TL Equipment Manual - Mn00126e Ed.02

SDH TL
User manual
MN.00126.E - 002 Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice. Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product. MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks. UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark. Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark. Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system. Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL). Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents
Section 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................................ 9 1.1 1.2 Introduction to the TL Radio Equipment ................................................................ 9 Equipment Features ........................................................................................... 9
RX EQUIPMENT DETAILS..........................................................................................12 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Ordering Guide.................................................................................................12 BRU (RF Branching Network Unit) .......................................................................16 MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit).................................................................17 SCSU (Baseband interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit)...........................17
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................18 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 General Information..........................................................................................18 Transmitter (TX)...............................................................................................19 Receiver (RX)...................................................................................................20 Modulator (MOD) ..............................................................................................21 Demodulator (DEM) ..........................................................................................21 Digital Processing .............................................................................................22 Overall ............................................................................................................23 RF Interference ................................................................................................24 Countermeasures to Fading................................................................................24 Signal Interface for STM-1 System ......................................................................25 3.10.1 Base Band Signal Interface ......................................................................25 3.10.2 Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface .......................................................25 3.10.3 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface ....................................................26 3.10.4 Jitter .....................................................................................................27 3.10.5 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) ...................................................................27 3.10.6 BSI .......................................................................................................27 3.11 Auxiliary Signal Interface ...................................................................................28 3.11.1 Radio User Channel (RUC)........................................................................28 3.11.2 Way Side (WS) .......................................................................................28 3.11.3 Order Wire (OW) ....................................................................................28 3.11.4 User Channel (UC) ..................................................................................29
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION .................................................................................30 4.1 4.2 4.3 General ...........................................................................................................30 Rack construction .............................................................................................34 Inter-Rack Connections .....................................................................................35
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
4.4 5
Shelf Layout ....................................................................................................35
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATION ...........................................................................42 5.1 Temperature and Humidity ................................................................................42
POWER REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................................44 6.1 6.2 6.3 General ...........................................................................................................44 Unit Power Consumption....................................................................................44 Equipment Power Consumption ..........................................................................45
RADIO FREQUENCY PLAN AND ANTENNA SYSTEM....................................................50 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 General Information..........................................................................................50 Radio Frequency Plan ........................................................................................50 Antenna System ...............................................................................................67 RF Branching Network .......................................................................................67
Section 2. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION
75
EQUIPMENT SIGNAL FLOW ......................................................................................75 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 General ...........................................................................................................75 Signal Interface................................................................................................75 SCSU Block......................................................................................................76 MSTU Block .....................................................................................................76 BRU Block........................................................................................................78 UIA.................................................................................................................78
STM-1 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION................................................................................82 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 STM-1 Electrical Signal Interface.........................................................................82 Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function) ......................................................................82 Space Diversity ................................................................................................86 MSTU Front Panel .............................................................................................87 Upper View of MSTU Adapter..............................................................................89
10 OW/UC/RUC/WS SIGNAL TRANSMISSION ..............................................................90 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 Engineering Orderwire (OW) ..............................................................................90 User Channel (UC) ............................................................................................91 Radio User Channel (RUC) .................................................................................91 Wayside Traffic (WS) ........................................................................................92 Digital Communication Channel (DCC) .................................................................92
11 OVERHEAD BIT ACCESS FOR TL SYSTEM ..................................................................93 11.1 11.2 MSOH and RSOH ..............................................................................................93 RFCOH ............................................................................................................96
12 RADIO PROTECTION SWITCH SYSTEM ...................................................................101 12.1 12.2 Outline of Radio Protection Switching ................................................................ 101 USW and BSW................................................................................................ 102
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
12.3 12.4 12.5
Switching Priority ........................................................................................... 104 Switching Initiator and Operation Time .............................................................. 105 Occasional Traffic (option) ............................................................................... 106
13 BASEBAND INTERFACE, SUPERVISORY/CONTROL & SWITCHING UNIT .................107 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 Signal Interface.............................................................................................. 108 Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit................................................................................ 109 Bipolar Switch for Optical Interface (OPT BSW) unit............................................. 109 Supervisory (SV) unit...................................................................................... 109 Timing Control Unit (TCU)................................................................................ 113 Embedded Communication (ECU)...................................................................... 113 Housekeeping (HK) unit (option)....................................................................... 113 Occasional Interface (OCC INTF/OPT OCC) unit (option)....................................... 114 Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit (option) ........................................... 114
14 APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................................115 14.1 14.2 Co-Channel Operation ..................................................................................... 115 Synchronization.............................................................................................. 117 14.2.1 Synchronization Source ......................................................................... 117 14.2.2 Synchronization Mode............................................................................ 117 14.2.3 Clock Mode .......................................................................................... 118 14.2.4 Quality Level (S1 byte) .......................................................................... 119 14.2.5 Line Clock Priority ................................................................................. 119 14.3 Orderwire Applications .................................................................................... 120 14.3.1 Orderwire Extension .............................................................................. 120 14.3.2 Digital Through..................................................................................... 120 14.3.3 Ring Protection ..................................................................................... 121
Section 3. INSTALLATION
123
15 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION........................................................................123 15.1 Storage, Unpacking and Inspection ................................................................... 123 15.1.1 Storage ............................................................................................... 123 15.1.2 Preparation .......................................................................................... 124 15.1.3 Unpacking and Inspection ...................................................................... 124 15.1.4 General Unpacking Method..................................................................... 124 15.2 15.3 Storage of Spare Units .................................................................................... 125 Accessories.................................................................................................... 125
16 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES AND JUMPERS ..................................................................126 16.1 Warning and General Handling ......................................................................... 126 16.1.1 Tools Required ..................................................................................... 126 16.1.2 Warning Messages ................................................................................ 126 16.1.3 Storage ............................................................................................... 126 16.1.4 Handling .............................................................................................. 127 16.2 Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables .................................................. 129 16.2.1 Tools Required ..................................................................................... 129
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
16.2.3 Connection Procedure............................................................................ 129 16.2.4 Disconnection Procedure ........................................................................ 129 16.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors ......................................................... 129 16.3.1 Tools Required ..................................................................................... 129 16.3.2 Procedure ............................................................................................ 130 16.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors....................................................... 130 16.4.1 Connector End-face Definitions ............................................................... 130 16.4.2 End-face Zone Definitions ...................................................................... 130 16.4.3 Defect Definitions ................................................................................. 131 16.4.4 Tools Required ..................................................................................... 132 16.4.5 Procedure ............................................................................................ 132 17 RACK INSTALLATION .............................................................................................134 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 Precautions.................................................................................................... 134 17.1.1 Suitable Places for Equipment Installation ................................................ 134 Safety Measures for Equipment Handling ........................................................... 134 Tools Required ............................................................................................... 135 Preparation.................................................................................................... 135 17.4.1 Bay Erection......................................................................................... 135 17.4.2 Bay Securing........................................................................................ 135 17.5 17.6 17.7 Rack Configuration.......................................................................................... 135 Shelf Configuration ......................................................................................... 137 How to Install Shelves & Units .......................................................................... 137 17.7.1 Preparation of Shelves........................................................................... 137 17.7.2 Mounting of Shelves .............................................................................. 139 17.7.3 Mounting of Slide In Units ...................................................................... 140 17.8 Expansion of BRU Module ................................................................................ 141
18 USER INTERFACE CONNECTION .............................................................................142 18.1 18.2 TL Signal Input............................................................................................... 142 18.1.1 Warning Messages ................................................................................ 142 Waveguide Connection .................................................................................... 143 18.2.1 Tools Required ..................................................................................... 144 18.2.2 Preparation .......................................................................................... 145 18.2.3 Precautions .......................................................................................... 145 18.3 Connection of Primary DC Power Lead ............................................................... 145 18.3.1 Tools Required ..................................................................................... 145 18.3.2 Procedure ............................................................................................ 146 18.3.3 Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment ........................................................... 147 18.3.4 Precautions .......................................................................................... 148 18.3.5 AMP hand Crimping Tool ........................................................................ 148 18.3.6 Crimping Procedures ............................................................................. 150 18.3.7 Office Power Supply Check ..................................................................... 150 18.3.7.1 18.3.7.2 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 Tools Required ....................................................................... 150 Procedure ............................................................................. 150
Frame Grounding............................................................................................ 151 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms................................................................ 152 Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors ......................................................................... 152 RF Branching Network Filter Connection............................................................. 153 Baseband Signal Cable Connection .................................................................... 153 18.8.1 STM-1 electrical signal Interface ............................................................. 153 18.8.2 STM-1 optical signal Interface................................................................. 154
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
18.9
Wayside Signal Cable Connection...................................................................... 155
19 CONNECTOR AND PIN ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................157 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 19.8 19.9 Connectors Layout on SCSU and UIA Block ........................................................ 157 19.1.1 Connectors on the BWB of SCSU ............................................................. 158 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1............................................. 159 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 2............................................. 160 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 3............................................. 161 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 4............................................. 162 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 5............................................. 163 Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel .............................................. 164 Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS................................................... 165 Connector PIN assignment for EOW................................................................... 167
19.10 Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC ............................................................... 168 19.11 Connector PIN assignment for User Channel ....................................................... 169 19.12 Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock ................................................ 170 19.13 Coaxial Cable for Operation Mode "RS" .............................................................. 171
Section 4. ACCEPTANCE TEST
173
20 VISUAL INSPECTION TEST .....................................................................................173 20.1 20.2 Visual Inspection ............................................................................................ 173 DC Power Supply Voltage Test.......................................................................... 174 20.2.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 174 20.2.2 Procedure ............................................................................................ 174 21 UNIT TO THE SHELF ...............................................................................................175 21.1 Warning Message ........................................................................................... 175 21.1.1 Laser Warning ...................................................................................... 175 21.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge Warning .............................................................. 175 21.2 21.3 Slide-In Unit Installation Procedure ................................................................... 176 Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units ............................................................. 176 21.3.1 Inserting a Slide-In Unit ........................................................................ 176 21.3.2 Removing a Slide-In Unit ....................................................................... 177 21.3.3 Removing an Optical Unit (OPT BSW/OPT OCC)......................................... 178 21.4 21.5 Installing the MSTU Unit .................................................................................. 179 Installing SCSU Unit........................................................................................ 179
22 ON-SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST ...................................................................................180 22.1 22.2 22.3 Scope of On-Site Acceptance Test ..................................................................... 180 Test Item of On-Site Acceptance Test ................................................................ 180 Test Equipment Required ................................................................................. 181
23 WAVEGUIDE/ANTENNA ORIENTATION TEST..........................................................182 23.1 23.2 Waveguide Sweeping ...................................................................................... 182 23.1.1 Procedure for Return Loss Measurement .................................................. 182 Antenna Orientation ........................................................................................ 183
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
23.2.1 AGC Current Monitoring ......................................................................... 184 23.2.2 Antenna XPIC Optimization .................................................................... 184 23.3 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarm ................................................................. 184
24 STATION TEST .......................................................................................................185 24.1 24.2 24.3 Hardware Setting............................................................................................ 185 24.1.1 Default Values ...................................................................................... 185 Provisioning (Software Setting) ........................................................................ 185 24.2.1 Default Values ...................................................................................... 185 Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency .................................................................. 185 24.3.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 186 24.3.2 Specification ........................................................................................ 186 24.3.3 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 186 24.4 Transmit Output Power Level ........................................................................... 192 24.4.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 192 24.4.2 Specification ........................................................................................ 192 24.4.3 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 192 24.5 Transmit Spectrum ......................................................................................... 193 24.5.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 193 24.5.2 Specification ........................................................................................ 194 24.5.3 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 194 24.6 Receiver (RX) AGC Range ................................................................................ 195 24.6.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 195 24.6.2 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 196 24.7 Optical Output Power Level .............................................................................. 197 24.7.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 197 24.7.2 Specification ........................................................................................ 198 24.7.3 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 198 24.8 24.9 Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level .................................................... 199 24.8.1 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 199 External Clock Supply...................................................................................... 200 24.9.1 Warning Messages ................................................................................ 200 24.9.2 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 201 24.10 Rack Alarm Test ............................................................................................. 202 24.10.1Test Equipment Required ...................................................................... 202 24.10.2Test procedure .................................................................................... 202 24.11 Appendix - MSTU Setting ................................................................................. 203 24.11.1MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................ 204 24.11.2DADE setting for SD ............................................................................. 206 24.12 Appendix - Hardware Setting............................................................................ 207 24.12.1Hardware Setting Position ..................................................................... 207 24.12.2TCU unit ............................................................................................. 209 24.12.3BSW unit ............................................................................................ 210 24.12.4OPT BSW unit...................................................................................... 211 25 HOP TEST ...............................................................................................................212 25.1 Receive (RX) Signal Level ................................................................................ 212 25.1.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 212 25.1.2 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 213 25.1.3 Specification ........................................................................................ 213 25.2 IF-IF Test ...................................................................................................... 214 25.2.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 214
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
25.2.2 Specification ........................................................................................ 214 25.2.3 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 215 25.3 25.4 IF DADE Test ................................................................................................. 218 25.3.1 IF DADE Test Procedure ......................................................................... 218 ATPC Test (LAB Test) ...................................................................................... 218 25.4.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 218 25.4.2 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 218 25.5 Adjustment of XPIC DADE (Only for Co-Channel Operation).................................. 221 25.5.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 221 25.5.2 Specification ........................................................................................ 221 25.5.3 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 222 25.6 Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test ................................................................... 224 25.6.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 224 25.6.2 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 224 25.7 BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test) ................................................................... 225 25.7.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 226 25.7.2 Specification ........................................................................................ 226 25.7.3 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 226 26 SECTION TEST........................................................................................................229 26.1 DCC/OW Test ................................................................................................. 229 26.1.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 229 26.1.2 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 229 26.2 Wayside Traffic Test........................................................................................ 230 26.2.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 230 26.2.2 Way Side Transmission Test ................................................................... 230 26.2.3 Wayside Input Characteristics Test .......................................................... 230 26.3 System BER Characteristics Test....................................................................... 231 26.3.1 Test Equipment Required ....................................................................... 232 26.3.2 Specification ........................................................................................ 232 26.3.3 Test Procedure ..................................................................................... 232 26.4 Synchronization Source Test ............................................................................ 233 26.4.1 Test Procedure - (Source Switching on Mode 1) ........................................ 234 26.4.2 Test Procedure - (Switching Test of TCU) ................................................. 236 27 MAJOR FUNCTION OF WEB LT ................................................................................237 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.4 27.5 27.6 Menu Tree ..................................................................................................... 237 Condition Message .......................................................................................... 239 Performance Monitoring................................................................................... 244 Control Command........................................................................................... 248 Provisioning ................................................................................................... 250 LED Indication................................................................................................ 253
Section 5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
261
28 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPY....................................................................................261 28.1 28.2 Maintenance Philosophy................................................................................... 261 Human Machine Interface ................................................................................ 261
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
29 LED INDICATION ...................................................................................................263 30 WEB LT ..................................................................................................................266 31 UNIT REPLACEMENT...............................................................................................268 31.1 31.2 31.3 31.4 Fan Replacement ............................................................................................ 268 MSTU and Other Units ..................................................................................... 269 SV unit Replacement ....................................................................................... 270 Returning Replaced Unit .................................................................................. 272
Section 6. APPENDIX
275
32 ABBREVIATION OF TL TERMS.................................................................................275
Section 7. LISTS AND SERVICES
285
33 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................285 34 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................291 35 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................295 35.1 RQ.00961 MODULE ......................................................................................... 295
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Section 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1
Introduction to the TL Radio Equipment
The TL series radio equipment (TL) is a high capacity (155 Mbit/s STM-1) system designed for trunk line transmission applications. The TL operate in the radio frequency bands of 4/5/U6/11 GHz with 40 MHz radio frequency spacing and U4/L6/L7/L8/13 GHz with 28/29/ 29.65 MHz radio frequency spacing. The equipment is fully solid state and is designed to meet ITU-T and ITU-R Recommendations for long haul and high capacity digital microwave radio systems. The modulation scheme used is 64/128 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) with forward error correction. The TL can be used in various types of SDH networks such as ring, media diversity or linear configurations, and various transmission path conditions such as over water, over mountains, inter or intra city routes. The TL accepts one synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1) signal per RF channel for single-feed/alternated operation, or two synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1) signals per RF channel for co-channel operation. The protection scheme is N+1 for single-feed/alternated operation and 2x(N+1) for co-channel operation. Various optional functions are provided, such as 2 Mb/s wayside traffic (carried by RFCOH and SOH respectively) and digital service channels (carried by RFCOH).
1.2
Equipment Features
The main features of the TL series radio equipment are as follows: Completely solid-state Fully SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) compatible digital radio. Super high density packaging
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Maximum sixteen (16) complete systems per rack is available. Five (5) types of system configurations are available per rack 1) Up to 7+1 single-feed operation 2) Up to 7+1 alternated operation 3) Up to 2x(3+1) co-channel operation 4) Up to 2x(7+1) co-channel operation 5) Up to 3+1 double terminal with same RF and single-feed operation High power amplifier using GaAs Field Effect Transistor (GaAs FET) with +29 dBm and +32 dBm (high power version) output power. (29 dBm for 11 GHz band and +27 dBm for 13 GHz band) Low power consumption of RF High Power Amplifier using IF pre-distortion linearity compensation. Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is available as standard configuration. Low noise amplifier using High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT) with a noise figure of 1.5 dB (typical) for 4-6 GHz band. High spectral efficiency of 8.5 bits/sec/Hz using 64 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (64 QAM MLCM) and 11.4 bits/sec/Hz using 128 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (128 QAM MLCM) for cochannel operation. High efficiency error correction using Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) is applied. In-Phase (IP) combiner type space diversity (SD) reception is available as standard. Space diversity circuit is fitted as standard and is enabled by the network management system (NMS) as a provisioning item. Powerful adaptive time domain equalizer (ATDE) with 11-tap fully digital linear transversal equalizer (TVE) with 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) Errorless protection switching with early warning detection on fading SDH STM-1 electrical interface is standard configuration and STM-1 optical interface without MSP function is available as an option. And also unit mixture of both STM-1 electrical and optical interface is available in the same rack. Radio user channel (RUC) of maximum 2 channels using RFCOH. Signal interfaces are available both VF and 64 kb/s signal. 64 kb/s signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.703 co-directional or contra-directional interface. 1 user channel using F1 byte of SOH per STM-1 is also available. 2x2 Mb/s wayside traffic per STM-1 using SOH and RFCOH Event management facility: Alarms and status of the equipment is reported by SEMF (Synchronous Equipment Management Function) using the Data Communication Channel (DCC) Performance management facility: Traffic performance of every hop and end-to-end can be monitored on each RF channel. Monitoring items are BBE (Background Block Error), BBER (Background Block Error Ratio), ES (Errored Seconds), ESR (Errored Second Ratio), SES (Severely Error Seconds), SESR (Severely Error Second Ratio), UAS (UnAvailable Seconds) and OFS (Out of Frame Second), number of pointer change and number of MSP and RPS switching. Configuration management facility: NE configuration is retrieved by the network management terminal and items such as NE ID, and alarm thresholds can be set as provisioning. Resource management facility: Physical inventory such as unit name can be read by the SEMF. Security management: Several layers for maintenance are provided to avoid mis-operation. Software download (SWDL) facility: Firmware for the operation of TL can be remotely download from the network management terminal. SNMP and HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) NMS Supervisory unit (SV) is composed both an SNMP embedded agent and a web server. These facilities provide integrated NMS environment among TL and various types of equipment such as MUX, ADM, routers and another venders radio equipment thanks to SNMP and good accessibility by HTTP which is not depend on management platform.
10
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
SDH MUX
SDH MUX
SDH Radio 1+N MS mode
SDH Radio 1+N MS mode
SDH MUX
Tributary MS
Tributary RS RS RS
Tributary
Fig.1 - Linear Configuration
SDH MUX
SDH MUX SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1 RS mode RS RS SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1 RS mode RS
SDH MUX
Tributary MS
Tributary
Tributary
Fig.2 - Media Diversity Configuration
MS Tributary SDH MUX
MS
Tributary SDH MUX SDH MUX
Tributary
RS
SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1
SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1
RS
RS
Fig.3 - Standard Ring Configuration
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
11
RX EQUIPMENT DETAILS
2.1
Ordering Guide
Assembling an TL rack requires the selection of the appropriate equipment from the ordering guide. Please consult SIAEs Sales and Marketing for the current ordering guide. Fig.4, Fig.5, Fig.6, Fig.7 and Fig.8 show the configuration of TL Radio.
TL Radio N+1 single-feed operation BRU
: ETSI Rack x 1
: Initial shelf with bonnet cover x 1
: RF Branching Network Unit Block

RF Branching Network Circuit 1 set (RF channel allocation dependen x Duplexer: 2 (with space diversity) x 1 (without space diversity)
MSTU
: Main Signal Transmission Unit Block

Main Signa l Transmission Unit:x (N+1), N=maximum 7
SCSU
: Baseband Interface, Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit Block
SV BSW TCU HK
: Supervisory Unit : Supervisory Unit x 1x 1 : BaseBand Switch Unit x n (n+m= N, N=maximum 7) : Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option) : Housekeeping Unit (option) x 2 maximum
OCC INTF : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit (option) x 1 OPT BSW : Baseband Switch unit for Optical (option) x m
OCC OPT : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit for Optical (option) x 1 VF DIG UIA
: VF module for radio user channel (option): x 2 maximum : 64 kbit/s module for radio user channel (option): x 2 maximum
: User Interface Area Block

Fig.4 - TL Radio for N+1, Single-feed Operation
Note: In case that operation mode is set to RS by provisioning, no TCU is needed.
12
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
TL Radio Alternated operation N+1 BRU
: ETSI Rack x 1
Initial shelf with bonnet cover : x 1
: RF Branching Network Unit Block

RF Branching Network Circuit 1 set (RF channel alloc. dependent) Duplexer: x 4 (with space diversity) X 2 (without space diversity)
MSTU SCSU
: Main Signal Transmission Unit Block

Main Signal Transmission Unit: x (N+1), N=maximum 7
: Baseband Interf., Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit SV BSW TCU HK

x x : Supervisory Unit 1 1
: BaseBand Switch Unit x n (n+m =N) : Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option) : Housekeeping Unit (option) x 2 maximum
OCC INTF : Occasional traffic Interface Unit (option) x m OPT BSW : Baseband Switch unit for Optical (option) x 1
OCC OPT : Occasional traffic Interface Unit for Optical (option) x 1 VF DIG UIA : VF module for radio user channel (option): x 2 maximum : 64 kbit/s module for radio user ch. (option):2 maximum
Fig.5 - TL Radio for N+1, Alternated Operation
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
13
TL Radio 2x(3+1) Co-Channel BRU
: ETSI Rack x 1 : Initial shelf with bonnet cover x 1 : RF Branching Network Unit Block RF Branching Network Circuit 1 set (RF channel allocation dependent) Duplexer: x 4 (with space diversity) X 2 (without space diversity)
MSTU SCSU
: Main Signal Transmission Unit Block Main Signal Transmission Unit: x 2(n+1), n=maximum 3 : Baseband Interface, Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit
SV BSW TCU
: Supervisory Unit x 1 : Supervisory Unit x 1

: BaseBand Switch Unit x a (a+b=2 n, n=maximum 3) : Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option)
BSW INTF : Baseband switch interface Unit x 1
HK
OCC INTF OPT BSW OCC OPT
: Housekeeping Unit (option) x 2 max. : Occasional traffic Interface Unit (option) x 2 maximum : Baseband Switch unit for Optical (option) x b : Occasional traffic Interface Unit for Optical (option) x 2 maximum : VF module for radio user channel (option): x 4 maximum : 64 kbit/s module for radio user channel (option):x 4 maximum
VF DIG UIA
Fig.6 - TL Radio for up to 2x(3+1), Co-Channel Operation
14
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
TL Radio 2x(7 ) Co-Channel +1
: ETSI Rack x 1 : Initial shelf with bonnet cover x 1 : Expansion shelf with bonnet cover x 1 : RF Branching Network Unit Block RF Branching Network Circuit 1 set (RF ch. allocation dependent) x Duplexer: 4 (with space diversity) X 2 (without space diversity) : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block Main Signal Transmission Unit: x 2(n+1), n=maximum 7 : Baseband Inter., Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit
BRU
MSTU SCSU
SV BSW TCU
x x : Supervisory Unit 1 1
: BaseBand Switch Unit x a (a+b=2n, n=maximum 7) : Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option) : BSW Interface Unit x 2
BSW INTF
HK
OCC INTF OPT BSW
: Housekeeping Unit (option) x 2 maximum : Occasional traffic Interface Unit (option) x 2 maximum : Baseband Switch unit for Optical (option) x b
OCC OPT : Occasional traffic Interf. Unit for Optical (option) x2 VF DIG UIA
: VF module for radio user channel (option) x 4 maximum : : 64 kbit/s module for radio user ch. (option):x 4 maximu
Fig.7 - TL Radio for up to 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
15
TL Radio 3+1Double Terminal

BRU
: ETSI Rack x 1 Initial shelf with bonnet cover x 1 : RF Branching Network Unit Block RF Branching Network Circuit 1 set (RF ch. allocation dependent) Duplexer: x 4 (with SD for both A-B and B-C direction) x 3 (with SD for A-B direc. and without SD for B-C direc.) x 2 (without SD for both A-B and B-C direction) ( h f b h d d ) : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block Main Signal Transmission Unit: x (n+1)+(m+1)=maximum
MSTU SCSU
: Baseband Inter., Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit SV BSW TCU ECU HK
OCC INTF OPT BSW
x : Supervisory Unit x 2 Sup ervisory Unit
: BaseBand Switch Unit x a (a+b=maximum 6) : Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option) : Embedded Communication Unit x 1 : Housekeeping Unit (option) x 2 maximum : Occasional traffic Interface Unit (option) x2 maximum : Baseba Switch unit for Optical (option) x b nd
OCC OPT : Occasional traffic Interf. Unit for Optical (option) x 2 max VF DIG UIA : VF module for radio user channel (option): x 4 max
: 64 kbit/s module for radio user ch. (option): x 4 max
Fig.8 - TL Radio for up to 3+1, Double Terminal Operation Note: Same radio frequency and GP1/GP2 are applied for A-B and B-C radio direction. In case that operation mode is set to RS by provisioning, no TCU is needed.
2.2
BRU (RF Branching Network Unit)
To specify the BRU, it is necessary to confirm the detail requirement as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 16 Operating frequency band Assigned RF channel number and frequency System configuration (1+0, 1+1, 2+1,........., 7+1) Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or co-channel operation With SD (Space Diversity) or without SD.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
2.3
MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit)
To specify the MSTU, it is necessary to confirm the detail requirement as follows: 1 2 3 Operating frequency band Assigned RF channel number and frequency Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or co-channel operation.
Note: SD receiver circuit is equipped as standard and be enabled by software as provisioning setting.
2.4
SCSU (Baseband interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit)
To specify the SCSU, it is necessary to describe the detail requirement as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or co-channel operation STM-1 electrical or optical interface Required optional unit name such as HK, TCU, OCC INTF, OPT RSW, OPT OCC, BSW INTF and its quantity Sub-module of SV unit for RUC (VF, Digital interface or none).
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
17
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
General Information
Tab.1 - General Specifications Description 64 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) for 4/5/U6/11 GHz band 128 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) for U4/L6/L7/U7/L8/13 GHz band Single-feed/Alternated operation One (1) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency Co-channel operation Two (2) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency Auxiliary signal Wayside traffic (2.048 Mb/s) Maximum 2 channels per STM-1 by using RFCOH and SOH. Maximum 2N channels for N+1 single-feed/alternated operation or Maximum 2 x 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation Radio User Channel (64 kb/s) Maximum 2 channels per system using RFCOH for N+1 Maximum 2 channels for N+1 single-feed/alternated operation or Maximum 2 x 2 channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation User Channel (SOH, 64 kb/s) One (1) channel per STM-1 using SOH Maximum N channels for N+1 single-feed/alternated operation or Maximum 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation
Modulation
Capacity
Repeating Method
Regenerative Same insert/separation method as for SDH fibre optic transmission system for terminal and repeater station
Overhead Byte Access
RS Section (Note) A1, A2, C1, B1, E1, F1, D1D3 byte MS Section (Note) B2, K1, K2, D4D12 and E2, M1 and S1 byte.
Hypothetical Reference Digital Path (HRDP)
In accordance with the latest ITU-R recommendation
18
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
3.2
Transmitter (TX)
Tab.2 - Transmitter section Description +29 dBm or +32 dBm 1 dB for 4-L8GHz band +29 dBm 1 dB for 11GHz band +27 dBm 1 dB for 13GHz band measured at MSTU unit output Linearizer circuit is employed to maintain optimum linearity RF band oscillation With PLL Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable Half band coverage of upper or lower half of the corresponding band (quarter band for 11 and 13GHz).
Output power
Linearity compensation
Local carrier
Local Frequency stability Within 10 ppm For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output < 60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz < 30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz Spurious emission within F040 MHz for 64QAM and F030 MHz for 128QAM is specified by the transmit spectrum specification. IF 1st IF: 2nd IF: Signal level: Variation: IF input (Test In) Impedance: Return loss: Chebycheff type RF filter 3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM 30 MHz for 128 QAM 70 MHz 844 MHz 10 dBm nominal 1 dB 75 ohm unbalanced >20 dB/ 70 MHz 13 MHz for 64 QAM > 20 dB/ 70 MHz 11 MHz for 128 QAM
Spurious emission
ATPC
Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) is available as standard. Power control level: 10 dB Response time: 100 ms Control initiation: Received signal threshold detection RSL=-45 dBm or -55 dBm or 65 dBm
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
19
3.3
Receiver (RX)
Tab.3 - Receiver section Description 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 4.0 4.5 dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB typical guaranteed typical guaranteed typical guaranteed typical guaranteed (for (for (for (for (for (for (for (for 4 - 6 GHz band) 4 - 6 GHz band 8 GHz band) 8 GHz band) 11 GHz band) 11 GHz band) 13 GHz band) 13 GHz band)
Noise figure (Note 1)
Note: Noise figure is measured at the MSTU unit input of both the main and SD receiver independently and at maximum gain of IF amplifier. RF band oscillation with PLL Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable Half band coverage of lower or upper half of the corresponding band (quarter band for 11 and 13 GHz band). For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output < 60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz < 30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz Within 10 ppm More than 100 dB with RX BPF measured at MSTU output when image and main signal level are equal, and with unmodulated carrier. 32 to 55 dBm Maximum level: Minimum level: 17 dBm (guaranteed), -10 dBm (typical) 76.5 dBm for 64QAM 74.5 dBm for 128QAM
Local carrier
Spurious emission Local Frequency stability Image rejection Normal received power Received input range (for BER at 1 x 10 3) AGC dynamic range IF
17 to 77 dBm measured at MSTU input 1st IF: 2nd IF: 70MHz 844MHz
Signal level: 10 dBm nominal, variation +l dB/2 dB for modulated RX input of 17 to 77 dBm IF output(70 MHz) (Test Out) Impedance: 75 ohm unbalanced Return loss: > 20 dB/ 70 MHz 13 MHz for 64 QAM 11 MHz for 128 QAM
Measured at monitoring point of MSTU unit. Chebycheff type RF filter 3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM 30 MHz for 128 QAM
IF filter
Butterworth type 3 dB bandwidth 40 MHz
20
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
3.4
Modulator (MOD)
Tab.4 - Modulation Description For 40 MHz Channel spacing: 64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) For 28/29/29.65/30 MHz Channel spacing: 128-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) 35% raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM 18% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM(L7/U7/13GHz)
Modulation
Spectrum shaping
25% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128QAM MLCM(U4/L6/L8GHz) Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution.
Local carrier
Crystal oscillator (XO)
Local frequency stability Within 15 ppm IF 70 MHz
3.5
Demodulator (DEM)
Tab.5 - Demodulation Description
Demodulation
Coherent detection/instantaneous decision 35% raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM 18% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM(L7/U7/13GHz)
Spectrum shaping
25% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM(U4/L6/L8GHz) Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution.
IF Adaptive equalizer in baseband Adaptive equalizer in IF
70 MHz 11-tap linear transversal equalizer (TVE) and 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) Slope equalizer
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
21
3.6
Digital Processing
Tab.6 - Digital Processing Description CMI-to-unipolar conversion Unipolar-to-CMI conversion Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame Section Adaptation (change the pointer) Scrambler/descrambler Addition/drop of section Overhead bit 1 2 3 Framing bit (A1, A2) Regenerator section party (B1) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3) Regenerator section orderwire (E1) User channel (F1) Multiplex section Parity (B2) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12) Multiplex section orderwire (E2) AIS, FERF (K1, K2)
SDH Electrical interface
4 5 6 7 8 9
10 Section trace (J0) 11 Far End Block Error (M1) 12 Synchronization status byte (S1) Optical-to-electrical conversion Electrical-to-optical conversion Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame Section Adaptation (change the pointer) Scrambler/descrambler Addition/drop of section Overhead byte 1 2 3 SDH optical interface (optional) 4 5 6 7 8 9 Framing bit (A1, A2) Regenerator section parity (B1) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3) Regenerator section orderwire (E1) User channel (F1) Multiplex section Parity (B2) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12) Multiplex section orderwire (E2) MSP CONT (K1, K2)
10 Section trace (J0) 11 Far End Block Error (M1) 12 Synchronization status byte (S1)
22
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
SDH frame to Radio frame conversion Radio frame complementary Overhead (RFCOH) insertion and detection 1 2 3 For Radio 4 5 6 7 8 9 Scrambling Route ID Frame alignment Redundancy bit for MLCM Digital service channel RPS control signal Route identification Way side traffic Transfer bit for 1 bit error Transfer bit for frequency measurement ATPC Control signal
2151 patterns 16 addresses pre-settable
FERF = Far End Receive Failure MSP = Multiplex Section Protection ATPC = Automatic Transmit Power Control
3.7
Overall
Tab.7 - Overall Description
Upfade BER
BER =
103
at RSL of 17 dBm measured at MSTU input
For 64 QAM MLCM: BER = 103 at RSL of 76.5 dBm typical BER = 103 at RSL of 74.5 dBm guaranteed BER = 106 at RSL of 73.5 dBm typical BER = 106 at RSL of 70.5 dBm guaranteed measured at MSTU input Note: RSL is 1 dB higher for 11 GHz band. Note: Space diversity improves RSL by 2 dB. For 128 QAM MLCM: BER = 103 at RSL of 74.0 dBm typical BER = 103 at RSL of 72.0 dBm guaranteed BER = 106 at RSL of 71.0 dBm typical BER = 106 at RSL of 68.0 dBm guaranteed measured at MSTU input Note: Space Diversity improves RSL by 2 dB. Note: RSL is 0.5 dB higher for L8G and 2.5 dB higher for 13 GHz. Residual BER RSL = Receive Signal Level BER < 1013 /hop/day at normal receiving condition
Downfade BER
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
23
3.8
RF Interference
Tab.8 - RF Interference Description
Co-channel Adjacent channel Innermost channel XPIC
BER = 103 at C/I = 22 dB for 64 QAM MLCM and 25 dB for 128 QAM MLCM measured at duplexer input and RSL of 50 dBm BER = 103 at C/I = 33 dB for 64 QAM MLCM and 30 dB for 128 QAM MLCM measured at duplexer input and RSL of 50 dBm C/N degradation at BER = 10-4 is included in the overall up-fade and downfade BER specification. Improvement factor using XPIC for co-channel operation = 18 dB measured at BER = 104 interference curve
The RF waveguide interface to/from the antenna system is as follows; Flange mating IEC standard UDR 40 UDR 48 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 100 BRJ-4 FUER -48 (EIAJ) BRJ-7 BRJ-7 BRJ -7 BRJ -7 BRJ -7 BRJ -10 JIS standard
Frequency band 4 GHz band 5 GHz band L7 GHz band U7 GHz band L6 GHz band U6 GHz band L8 GHz band 11 GHz band
Other interfaces are available as options
3.9
Countermeasures to Fading
Tab.9 - Countermeasures to Fading Description
SD
In Phase combiner in IF stage LO endless phase shifter Two types are available;
SD DADE Method
Compensation by RF feeder length (equivalent to 25 m), or Compensation by delay adjuster at IF (equivalent to 100 ns). SD DADE is adjusted by the delay line on MSTU unit.
24
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Adaptive time domain equalizer in baseband 20 tap full digital type Adaptive Equalizer (a) 11-tap transversal equalizer (TVE) (b) 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) Adaptive frequency domain equalizer in IF (a) Slope equalizer (SLP EQL) Unipolar switch in unipolar stage Errorless protection switching with early warning detection for fade Uni-directional switching N+1 for single-feed/alternated operation 2x(N+1) for co-channel operation Bipolar switch in bipolar stage Hit switch for equipment failure Bi-directional switching N+1 for single-feed/alternated operation 2x(N+1) for co-channel operation XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is inside Demodulator module as standard (only for co-channel operation by provisional setting) Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) Coding gain for 64QAM MLCM: FEC Coding gain for 128QAM MLCM: ATPC range: Control speed: 2.0 dB at BER=103 3.5 dB at BER=106 2.0 dB at BER=103 3.7 dB at BER=106 10 dB 100 dB/sec
Radio protection system
ATPC
3.10
Signal Interface for STM-1 System
3.10.1
Base Band Signal Interface
The Base Band Signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T G.957 and G.703.
3.10.2
Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface

Tab.10 - Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface (OPT RSW unit)
Bit Rate Unit Name Application code (ITU-T G.957) Typical hop Operation wavelength range (nm)
SDH level 1 155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm OPT BSW 1 (S-1.1) 0-15 Km 1260-1360 OPT RSW 2 (L-1.1) 15-40 Km 1280-1335
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
25
Transmitter at reference point S: Source type
MLM 7.7
MLM -
Spectral characteristics: Maximum RMS width (nm) Maximum 20 dB width (nm) Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) Mean launched power: Maximum (dBm) Minimum (dBm) Minimum Bit rate extinction ratio (dB)
30 8 15 8.2 0 5 10 1028 N/A 10-28 NA NA NA
Optical path between S & R: Attenuation range (dB) 012 Maximum dispersion ps/nm) 96 Optical path between S and R: Attenuation range Maximum dispersion (ps/nm) 0-12 96
Minimum optical return loss of cable point at S, including and NA connectors (dB) Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R Receiving at reference point R Minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload Maximum optical path penalty (including chirp penalty and dispersion penalty (dB) Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R (dB) Connector Used a. MLM = Multi-Longitudinal Mode SLM = Single-Longitudinal Mode 28 8 1 NA LC Duplex NA
34 10 1 NA
3.10.3
Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface

Tab.11 - Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface (BSW unit)
Bit rate Code format Pulse mask Impedance Return loss Input cable length Coaxial cable Connector used
155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm Coded Mark Inversion (CMI) In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703 75-ohm nominal, unbalanced > 15 dB / 8~240 MHz, measured at base band input port The attenuation of the coaxial cable pair should be assumed to follow an approximately root f law and to have a maximum insertion loss of 12.7 dB at a frequency of 78 MHz. 2.5C-QEW or equivalent 1.0/2.3 type coaxial connector is standard. Other connectors are available at customer's request.
26
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
3.10.4
Jitter
Jitter tolerance
The TL radio equipment tolerates the input jitter applied according to ITU-T G.958 with Type A specified on Table 2.
Jitter transfer
The TL radio equipment meets the jitter transfer specification given in ITU-T Rec. G.958 Figure 6.2 with the jitter transfer parameter specified for Type B in Table 1/G.958 when sinusoidal jitter up to the mask level in Figure 6.3/G.958 with the jitter tolerance parameter specified for Type A in Table 2/G.958 is applied at the STM-1 input.
3.10.5
Terminal
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
When the Base Band signal (optical/electrical) or radio signal from the optical equipment or radio equipment is lost, the TL generates a AU- AIS (MS mode) or a MS-AIS (RS mode) to the next equipment. When the AU-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the TL transfers the AU-AIS to the next equipment after SOH processing. When MS-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the TL transfers MS-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH processing in case of RS operation, and transfers AU-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH and MSOH processing in case of MS operation.
Repeater
When frame or signal loss is detected, the TL generates MS-AIS to the next equipment.
3.10.6
BSI
Transmission
Transparent transmission (BSI transmission). The property of a binary transmission channel, telecommunication circuit or connection, that permits all sequences of binary signal elements to be conveyed over it at its specified bit rate, without change to the value of any signal elements.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
27
3.11
Auxiliary Signal Interface
3.11.1
Radio User Channel (RUC)

Tab.12 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (RUC)
Transmission Bit rate Interface
Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH bits 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) per system Combination of VF and 64 kbit/s available by mounting optional sub-PCB module on the SV units. Input level: 16 dBr nominal (16 to-0.5 dBr, 0.5 step) Output level: +7 dBr nominal (8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step) Voice maximum level: 3 dBmo
VF interface
No. of CH Maximum 2 CH Amplitude response: In accordance with ITU-T G.712 Signal-to-distortion: In accordance with ITU-T G.712 Impedance 600- balanced
Digital interface Connector used
Interface: Co-directional or contra-directional Multi-pin connector
3.11.2
Way Side (WS)

Tab.13 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (WS)
Capacity
2048 kbit/s x 2 per STM-1 Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH and/or SOH bits
Transmission
One wayside traffic is transferred through RFCOH bits, the other is through not defined bytes in SOH In accordance with ITU-T G.703 Multi-pin connector for 120 W balanced Coaxial connector, 1.0/2.3 type for 75 W unbalanced
Digital interface Connector used
3.11.3
Order Wire (OW)

Tab.14 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (OW)
Transmission Bit rate Interface
Bit insertion/separation to/from E1 and E2 of SOH. 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) Express orderwire and omnibus orderwire 2-W for internal telephone set and external use 4-W for branching connector
28
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
2W Interface Input level: 0.0 dBr nominal Output level: 2.0 dBr nominal Interface level Voice maximum level: 3 dBmo 4W Interface Input level: 4 dBr nominal (16 to 0.5 dBr, 0.5 step) Output level: 4 dBr nominal (8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step) Voice maximum level: 3 dBmo
3.11.4
User Channel (UC)

Tab.15 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (User Channel)
Transmission Bit rate Interface Interface
Bit insertion/separation to/from F1 byte of SOH. 64 kbit/s x 1 (equivalent to 1 CH telephony) per STM-1 64 kbit/s Interface: Co-directional or contra directional Pulse mask: In accordance with ITU-T G.703
Connector used
Multi-pin connector
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
29
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
4.1
General
Each rack has dimensions in accordance with the ETSI standard as follows: 2200 mm height 600 mm width 345 mm depth including shelf bonnet cover.
Antenna Port Main SD
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface 2,200 mm
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface A-B Max. 7+1 Single-feed
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface B-C Max. 7+1 Single-feed
Max. 7+1 Single-feed
Depth: 345 mm
A- Station 600 mm Terminal Configuration
B- Station 1,200 mm Repeater Configuration Back- toback terminal Configuration
Fig.9 - TL Radio for N+1, Single-feed Operation
30
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Antenna Port Main SD Main
SD
SD
SD
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface A-B Max. 7+1 Alternated
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface B-C Max. 7+1 Alternated
Max. 7+1 Alternated
Depth: 345 mm
Fig.10 - TL Radio for N+1, Alternated Operation
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
31
Antenna Port Main SD Main SD
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface A-B
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface B-C Max. 2x(3+1) Co-Channel
Max. 2x(3+1) Co-Channel
Depth: 345 mm
Fig.11 - TL Radio for 2x(3+1), Co-Channel Operation
32
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface A-B
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface B-C Max. 2x(3+1) Co-Channel
Expansion Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface Depth: 345 mm Max. 2x(4+0) Co-Channel A- Station 600 mm Terminal Configuration
Expansion Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface East-to-West Max. 2x(4+0) Co-Channel B- Station 1,200 mm
Expansion Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface West-to-East Max. 2x(4+0) Co-Channel
Repeater Configuration Back- toback terminal Configuration
Fig.12 - TL Radio for 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
33
Antenna Port MainSD Main SD
Initial Shelf Consisting of; BRU block MSTU block SCSU block User Interface 2,200 mm A-B and B-C Max. 3+1 both routes Double Term
Depth: 345 mm
A- Station 600 mm Terminal configuration
Fig.13 - TL Radio for 3+1, Double Terminal Operation
4.2
Rack construction
The rack construction is as follows: Rack Initial shelf with PCB back-board and bonnet cover Expansion shelf with PCB back-board and bonnet cover Slide-in-units (SIU).
On the PCB back-board, there are connectors and DC power supply terminals as follows: Multi-pin and coaxial connectors for data Multi-pin connectors for alarm and status output for housekeeping bits Power supply terminal from power supply system and non-fuse breaker.
Initial/expansion shelves comprise the RF branching network unit (BRU) block, main signal transmission unit (MSTU) block, baseband interface, supervisory/control & switching unit (SCSU) block and user interface area (UIA) block. A multi-layer PCB back-board is used for plug-in units.
34
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Multi-pin connectors on the back-board are high-reliability type and have the facilities of protection against mis-insertion. The RF branching network is housed above the MSTU block. The RF branching network consists of RF band pass filters and circulators for RF channel separation. Connection between the RF branching network and the MSTU units are made by semi-rigid coaxial cables with SMA connectors via an MSTU adapter. All units are plug-in type and no wiring is required during installation and maintenance. Units have cardpullers for easy card extraction and unit locking. All units can be accessed from the front of the rack.
4.3
Inter-Rack Connections
No inter-rack cabling and connections are required to the PCB back-board.
4.4
Shelf Layout
Typical shelf configurations for each system operation are shown in Fig.14, Fig.15, Fig.16, Fig.17, Fig.18 and Fig.19.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
35
490 mm Main-port W /C BPF BPF BPF SD-port W C BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF DUP SD RX TX BRU
MSTU
MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
1,155 mm HK2 HK1 OCC INTF BSW(M7) BSW(M6) BSW(M5) BSW(M4) BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) TCU TCU SV NFB1 NFB2 NFB3 Connectors TERM SCSU UIA
Fig.14 - Shelf Layout of N+1, Single-feed Operation
36
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
490 mm V(H) Main-port W /C BPF BPF BPF V(H) SD-port W /C BPF BPF BPF H(V) Main-port W C BPF BPF BPF H(V) SD-port W /C BPF BPF BPF DUP SD RX TX BRU
MSTU
MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
1,155 mm HK2 HK1 OCC INTF BSW(M7) BSW(M6) BSW(M5) BSW(M4) BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) TCU TCU SV NFB1 NFB2 NFB3 Connectors TERM SCSU UIA
Fig.15 - Shelf Layout of N+1, Alternated Operation 37
490 mm V(H) Main-port W /C BPF BPF BPF V(H) SD-port W /C BPF BPF BPF H(V) Main-port WC BPF BPF BPF H(V) SD-port W /C BPF BPF BPF DUP SD RX TX BRU
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
MSTU
1,155 mm
BSW INTF OCC INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X OCC INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) SV NFB1 NFB2 NFB3 Connectors TERM
SCSU
UIA
Fig.16 - Shelf Layout of 2x(3+1), Co-Channel Operation
38
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
MSTU
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
1,155 mm
BSW INTF
Fig.17 - Shelf Layout of 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation - (Initial shelf)
BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1)
BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X SV Connectors
SCSU NFB1 NFB2 NFB3
TERM
USI
39
BPF
BPF
BPF
MSTU(M7, H-pol) MSTU(M6, H-pol) MSTU(M5, H-pol) MSTU(M4, H-pol) MSTU(M7, V-pol) MSTU(M6, V-pol) MSTU(M5, V-pol) OCC INTF BSW(M7) BSW(M6) BSW(M5) BSW(M4) OCC INTF BSW(M7) BSW(M6) BSW(M5) BSW(M4)
MSTU(M4, V-pol)
? 930
Fig.18 - Shelf Layout of 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation - (Expansion shelf)
MSTU
SCSU
BRU
SD
RX
TX
BPF
BPF
490 mm
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
Connectors
BPF
BPF
BPF
TERM
UIA
40
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
MSTU
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
1,155 mm
A- B direction,RPS1
B- C direction,RPS2
Fig.19 - Shelf Layout of 3+1, Double Terminal Operation - (Initial shelf)
OCC INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X OCC INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) SV(A-B direction) SV(B-C direction) ECU NFB1 NFB2 NFB3 Connectors TERM
SCSU
UIA
41
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATION
5.1
Temperature and Humidity
Performance guaranteed within the solid line below:
(deg) 45 35
10 0
10
20 50 Rel ative Humidity (%)
95
Fig.20 - Temperature and humidity
Short term operation
-5 to 50C
Note: Short term is defined as a period not exceeding 72 consecutive hours or a total 15 days per year. In this case equipment is operable, but performance is not guaranteed Storage/shipping Temperature: -20C to +55C, Humidity: 0% to 95% (@35C)
Altitude
Performance guaranteed Storage/shipping Up to 3,500 meters Up to 15,000 meters
Vibration
In accordance with ETSI.
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (optional) Radiated emission In accordance with EN55022 class A or B Class A: < 40 dB for 30.0 to 230.0 MHz (quasi-peak)
42
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
< 47 dB for 230.0 to 1000.0 MHz (quasi-peak) Class B: < 30 dB for 30.0 to 230.0 MHz (quasi-peak) < 37 dB for 230.0 to 1000.0 MHz (quasi-peak). Conducted emission In accordance with EN55022 Class A or Class B Class A < 79 dB (quasi-peak), 66 dB (average) for 0.15 to 0.5 MHz < 73dB (quasi-peak), 60dB (average) for 0.5 to 30.0 MHz Class B < 66-56dB (quasi-peak), 56-46dB (average) for 0.15 to 0.5 MHz < 56dB (quasi-peak), 46dB (average) for 0.5 to 5 MHz < 60dB (quasi-peak), 50dB (average) for 5 to 30 MHz In accordance with EN61000-4-2 4 kV direct discharge, 10 times each, no error in main signal 8 kV air discharge, 10 times each, no error in main signal 4 kV indirect discharge by using connection plate, 10 times each, no error in main signal In accordance with EN61000-4 33 V/m, swept 80 MHz to 1 GHz/80% AM'ed wave from bay front, back and side, no error in main signal In accordance with EN1000-4-4 - 0.5 kV direct discharge by using capacitive clump in the signal and power supply lines, 1 minute, no error in main signal In accordance with EN1000-4-6 - 3 Vrms, swept 150 kHz to 80 MHz/80% AM'ed wave direct discharge by using current clump in the signal and power supply lines, 1 minute, no error in main signal.
Immunity Electrostatic discharge
Immunity Radiated susceptibility
Immunity First Transient
Immunity RF Common Mode
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
43
POWER REQUIREMENTS
6.1
General
The power supply voltage to all equipment is DC with positive ground. DC input voltage, -48 V (-36 V to -72 V) Power supply circuits of all the equipment have the provisioning as follows: Over current protection (Secondary) Over voltage protection (Secondary) Surge protection (Primary): Vp = 2 kV Rise and fall time (Vp/2): tr = 1.2 m sec, tf = 50 m sec.
A power supply switch using non-fuse breaker is located on each MSTU, SCSU, and BBIU.
6.2
Unit Power Consumption
The power consumption of each unit is shown in Tab.16. Tab.16 - Power Consumption of each unit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 MSTU MSTU MSTU SV TCU BSW OPT BSW 1 OPT BSW 2 BSW INTF OCC INTF OPT OCC HK1 HK2 Unit 135 110 135 16 10 2 7 7 2 0.2 6 5 5 Optical interface (Code S.1-1) Optical interface (Code L.1-1) Pc (W) Remarks +32 dBm output with SD +29 dBm output with SD For 11/13 GHz band
Note: Unit power consumption includes efficiency of power supply unit. (75 %).
44
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
6.3
Equipment Power Consumption
The power consumption of various type of equipment are shown in Tab.17, Tab.18, Tab.19, Tab.20, Tab.21, Tab.22, Tab.23, Tab.24, Tab.25, Tab.26. Tab.17 - Power Consumption for N+1, Single-feed/Alternated Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 electrical interface No Equipment/block 1+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x2 - SCSU x1 3+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 7+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 1+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x2 3+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x2 7+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option
300
570
1120
600
1140
2240
Tab.18 - Power Consumption for N+1, Single-feed/Alternated Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 electrical interface No Equipment/block 1+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x2 - SCSU x1 3+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 7+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 1+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x2 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option
250
480
930
500
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
45
3+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x2 7+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2
960
With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option
1860
Tab.19 - Power Consumption for 2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 electrical interface No Equipment/block 2x(1+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 2x(3+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 2x(7+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 2x(1+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x2 2x(3+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 2x(7+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x32 - SCSU x4 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +32 dBm With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option
570
1120
2200
1140
2240
4400
Tab.20 - Power Consumption for 2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 electrical interface No Equipment/block 2x(1+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 2x(3+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 2x(7+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +29 dBm With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option
480
930
1830
46
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
2x(1+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x2 2x(3+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 2x(7+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x32 - SCSU x4
960
With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option
1860
2660
Tab.21 - Power Consumption for N+1, Single-feed/Alternated Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 optical interface No Equipment/block 1+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x2 - SCSU x1 3+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 7+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 1+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x2 3+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x2 7+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option
305
580
1155
600
1140
2260
Tab.22 - Power Consumption for N+1, Single-feed/Alternated Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 optical interface No Equipment/block 1+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x2 - SCSU x1 3+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option
255
490
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
47
7+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 1+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x2 3+1 repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x2 7+1 terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2
965
With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option
500
1160
1830
Tab.23 - Power Consumption for 2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 optical interface No Equipment/block 2x(1+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 2x(3+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 2x(7+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x1 2x(1+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x2 2x(3+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 2x(7+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option
580
1150
2270
1140
2240
4400
Tab.24 - Power Consumption for 2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 optical interface No Equipment/block 2x(1+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +29 dBm w/o option
490
48
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
2x(3+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 2x(7+1) terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x1 2x(1+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x2 2x(3+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x16 - SCSU x2 2x(7+1) repeater Consisting of: - MSTU x32 - SCSU x4
960
With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option
1900
1160
1860
3660
Tab.25 - Power Consumption for 3+1, Double Terminal Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 optical interface No Equipment/block 1+1 double terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 3+1 double terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +32 dBm w/o option With SD +32 dBm w/o option
580
1150
Tab.26 - Power Consumption for 3+1, Double Terminal Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 optical interface No Equipment/block 1+1 double terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x4 - SCSU x1 3+1 double terminal Consisting of: - MSTU x8 - SCSU x1 Pc (W) Remarks With SD +29 dBm w/o option With SD +29 dBm w/o option
490
960
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
49
RADIO FREQUENCY PLAN AND ANTENNA SYSTEM
7.1
General Information
Tab.27 shows the ITU-R recommendations for the radio frequency plan. Tab.27 - ITU-R Recommendations Band U4 GHz band 4 GHz band 5 GHz band L6 GHz band U6 GHz band L7 GHz band U7 GHz band L8 GHz band 11 GHz band 11 GHz band 13 GHz band Recommendation ITU-R Recommendation F.382-7 ITU-R Recommendation F.635-6 Annex-1 ITU-R Recommendation F.1099-3 Annex-1 ITU-R Recommendation F.383-7 ITU-R Recommendation F.384-8 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-8 Annex-1 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-8 ITU-R Recommendation F.386-6 ITU-R Recommendation F.387-9(12-pair system) ITU-R Recommendation F.387-9 Annex-2(11-pair system) ITU-R Recommendation F.497-6
7.2
Radio Frequency Plan
Upper 4 GHz band

3803.5 to 4203.5 MHz Centre frequency 4003.5 MHz Guard band 21 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Centre gap 68 MHz 29 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 58 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 213 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 5+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2(5+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.21.
50
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
4 GHz band
3600 to 4200 MHz Centre frequency 3900 MHz Guard band 20 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Centre gap 80 MHz 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 320 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 6+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2(6+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.22.
5 GHz band
4400 to 5000 MHz Centre frequency 4700 MHz Guard band 30 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Centre gap 60 MHz 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 300 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 6+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2(6+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.23.
Lower 6 GHz
5925 to 6425 MHz Centre frequency 6175 MHz Guard band 20.2 MHz (Lower band) and 20.21 MHz (Upper band) Centre gap 44.49 MHz 29.65 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 59.30 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 252.04 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.24.
Upper 6 GHz band

6430 to 7110 MHz Centre frequency 6770 MHz Guard band 30 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Centre gap 60 MHz 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
51
340 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.25.
Lower 7 GHz band

7125 to 7425 MHz Centre frequency 7275 MHz Guard band 10 MHz (Lower band) and 17 MHz (upper band) Centre gap 49 MHz 28 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 56 MHz frequency spacing (single-feed/alternated operation) 161 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 4+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2x(4+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.26.
Upper 7 GHz band

7425 to 7725 MHz Centre frequency 7575 MHz Guard band 17 MHz (Lower band and Upper band) Centre gap 42 MHz 28 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 56 MHz frequency spacing (single-feed/alternated operation) 154 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 4+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2x(4+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.27.
Lower 8 GHz band

7725 to 8275 MHz Centre frequency 8000 MHz Guard band Centre gap 103.77 MHz 29.65 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 59.30 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 311.32 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.28.
11 GHz band (12-pair plan)

10700 to 11700 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.387-9)
52
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Centre frequency 11200 MHz Guard band 15 MHz Centre gap 90 MHz 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 530 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation
Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.29.
11 GHz band (11-pair plan)

10700 to 11700 MHz (ITU-R Rec. F.387-9 Annex-2) Centre frequency 11200 MHz Guard band 35 MHz (lower band) and 75 MHz (upper band) Centre gap 90 MHz 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 490 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.30.
13 GHz band
12750 to 13250 MHz Centre frequency 12996 MHz Guard band 15 MHz (Lower band) and 23 MHz (Upper band) Centre gap 70 MHz 28 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel operation) 56 MHz frequency spacing (single-feed/alternated operation) 266 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for single-feed/alternated operation 2x(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency is shown in Fig.31.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
53
a)
Single -feed operation 400 MHz 21 MHz 1 2 3
213 MHz
4 5 6 1 2 3 4
21 MHz 5 6
V (H) 29 MHz 68 MHz
b)
Dual -feed/Alternated operation 400 MHz 21 MHz 1 3 5
21 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 -channel operation 3
213 MHz 58 MHz 5
c) Dual
-feed/Co
400 MHz 21 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 4 5 6 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 2 213 MHz 58 MHz 4 3 5 6 1 2 3 4 21 MHz 5 6
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
RF frequency (MHz) 3824.5 3853.5 3882.5 3911.5 3940.5 3969.5 4037.5 4066.5 4095.5 4124.5 4153.5 4182.5
Fig.21 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F.382-7)
54
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
a) Single
-feed operation
600 MHz 20 MHz 1 2 3 320 80 MHz 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 20 MHz 6 7
V (H) 40 MHz b) Dual -feed/Alternated operation 600 MHz 20 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 c) Dual -feed/Co -channel 4 6 2 4 6 3 320 80 MHz 5 7 1 3 20 MHz 5 7 80 MHz
600 320 80 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RF frequency (MHz) 3620.0 3660.0 3700.0 3740.0 3780.0 3820.0 3860.0 3940.0 3980.0 4020.0 4060.0 4100.0 4140.0 4180.0
Fig.22 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 635-6 Annex-1)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
55
a) Single-feed operation 600 MHz 300 MHz 30 MHz 80 1 V (H) 2 3 4 5 6 40 60 MHz MHz 7 1 2 3 4 5 30 MHz 6 7
b) Dual -feed/Alternated 600 MHz 300 MHz 30 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 4 6 600 MHz 300 MHz 30 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 2 3 40 80 MHz 4 5 6 MH 7 60 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 30 MHz 6 7 2 4 6 3 40 80 MHz 5 MHz 60 MHz 7 1 3 5 30 MHz 7
c) Dual -feed/Co -channel operation
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RF frequency (MHz) 4430.0 4470.0 4510.0 4550.0 4590.0 4630.0 4670.0 4730.0 4770.0 4810.0 4850.0 4890.0 4930.0 4970.0
Fig.23 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099-3 Annex-1)
56
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
a) Single -feed operation 252.04 MHz 20.2 MHz 1 V (H) b) Dual -feed/Alternated operation 500 20.2 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 4 6 c) Dual -feed/Co -channel operation 252.04 MHz 59.30 MHz 29.65 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 500 20. 2 20.21 MHz 44.49 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 4 6 8 252.04 MHz 59.30 MHz 29.65 MHz 3 5 7 44.49 MHz 1 3 5 7 20.21 MHz 2 59.30 MHz 29.65 MHz 3 4 5 6 7 8 44.49 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 500 20.21 MHz
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RF frequency (MHz) 5945.20 5974.85 6004.50 6034.50 6063.15 6093.45 6123.10 6152.75 6197.24 6226.89 6256.54 6286.19 6315.84 6345.49 6375.14 6404.79
Fig.24 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 383-7)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
57
a) Single -feed operation 680 MHz 30 MHz 1 V (H) 2 3 340 MHz 80 MHz 60 MHz 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 30 MHz
b) Dual -feed/Alternated operation 680 MHz 340 MHz 30 MHz 40 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 3 5 7 1 60 MHz 3 5 7 30 MHz
c) Dual -feed/Co -channel operation 340 MHz 30 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x 2 40 MHz 3 4 5 6 7 8 680 MHz 30 60 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MHz
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RF frequency (MHz) 6460.0 6500.0 6540.0 6580.0 6620.0 6660.0 6700.0 6740.0 6800.0 6840.0 6880.0 6920.0 6960.0 7000.0 7040.0 7080.0
Fig.25 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 384-8)
58
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
a) Single -feed operation 300 MHz 10 MHz 28 MHz 1 V (H) 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 56 MHz 161 MHz 49 MHz 17 MHz
b) Dual -feed/Alternated 300 MHz 161 MHz 10 MH 28 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 c) Dual -feed/Co -channel operation 4 300 MHz 2 4 3 5 1 3 5 56 MHz 49 MHz 17 MHz
10 MH 1 V (H) H (V) 1
56 MHz 28 MHz 2 3
161 MHz 49 MHz 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 17 MHz
1X
2X
3X
4X
5X
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
RF frequency (MHz) 7135 7163 7191 7219 7247 7296 7324 7352 7380 7408
Fig.26 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-8 Annex-1)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
59
a) Single -feed operation 300 MHz 17 MHz 56 MHz 28 MHz 1 V (H) 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 154 MHz 42 MHz 17 MHz
b) Dual -feed/Alternated operation 300 MHz 17 MHz 56 MHz 28 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 c) Dual -feed/Co -channel 300 MHz 17 MHz 56 MHz 28 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 4 5 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 154 MHz 42 MHz 17 MHz 4 2 4 3 5 1 3 5 154 MHz 42 MHz 17 MHz
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
RF frequency (MHz) 7442 7470 7498 7526 7554 7596 7624 7652 7680 7708
Fig.27 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 385-8)
60
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
a) Single -feed operation 550 MHz 22.7 MHz 1 V (H) 2 3 311.32 MHz 59.30 MHz 29.65 MHz 4 5 6 7 8 103.77 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8.43 MHz
b) Dual -feed/Alternated operation 550 MHz 22.7 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 4 2 c) Dual -feed/Co -channel 6 8 550 MHz 22.7 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x 2 3 311.32 MHz 59.30 MHz 29.65 MHz 4 5 6 7 8 103.77 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8.43 MHz 2 4 6 8 3 311.32 MHz 59.30 MHz 29.65 MHz 5 7 103.77 MHz 1 3 5 7 8.43 MHz
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RF frequency (MHz) 7747.70 7777.35 7807.00 7836.65 7866.30 7895.95 7925.60 7955.25 8059.02 8088.67 8118.32 8147.97 8177.62 8207.27 8236.92 8266.57
Fig.28 - L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
61
12 pair system a) Single -feed operation 1000 MHz 15 MHz 1 V (H) 2 3 530 MHz 1 1 1 2 3 15 MHz 11 12
b) Dual -feed/Alternated 1000 MHz 15 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 1 2 12 3 530 MHz 1 1 3 15 MHz 11
c) Dual -feed/Co -channel operation 1000 MHz 15 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 11 12 1x 2x 3x 11 12 2 3 530 MHz 1 1 1 2 3 15 MHz 11 12
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6
RF frequency (MHz) 10715.0 10755.0 10795.0 10835.0 10875.0 10915.0
62
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10955.0 10995.0 11035.0 11075.0 11115.0 11155.0 11245.0 11285.0 11325.0 11365.0 11405.0 11445.0 11485.0 11525.0 11565.0 11605.0 11645.0 11685.0
Fig.29 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 387-9)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
63
11 pair system a) Single -feed operation 1000 MHz 35 MHz 1 V 2 3 490 MHz 90 1 1 1 2 3 10 11 75 MHz
b) Dual -feed/Alternated operation 1000 MHz 35 MHz 1 V H 2 1 2 10 3 490 MHz 90 1 1 3 11 75 MHz
c) Dual -feed/Co -channel operation 1000 MHz 35 MHz 1 V H 1 2 3 10 11 1x 2x 3x 10 11 2 3 490 MHz 90 1 1 1 2 3 10 11 75 MHz
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6
RF frequency (MHz) 10735.0 10775.0 10815.0 10855.0 10895.0 10935.0
64
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
10975.0 11015.0 11055.0 11095.0 11135.0 11225.0 11265.0 11305.0 11345.0 11385.0 11425.0 11465.0 11505.0 11545.0 11585.0 11625.0
Fig.30 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 387-9 Annex-2)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
65
a) Single -feed operation 500 MHz 15 MHz 1 V (H) 28 b) Dual -feed/Alternated 500 MHz 15 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 2 4 6 8 2 500 MHz 15 MHz 1 V (H) H (V) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x 2 3 266 MHz 56 MHz 28 MHz 4 5 6 7 8 70 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 23 MHz 4 6 8 3 266 MHz 56 MHz 5 7 1 3 5 7 23 MHz 70 MHz 2 3 266 MHz 56 MHz 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 23 MHz
c) Dual -feed/Co -channel operation
RF CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RF frequency (MHz) 12765 12793 12821 12849 12877 12905 12933 12961 13031 13059 13087 13115 13143 13171 13199 13227
Fig.31 - 3 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F.497-7) 66
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
7.3
Antenna System
A common antenna system is used to transmit and receive. In this case two (2) antennas are used without space diversity and four (4) antennas are used with space diversity, per hop per end. One dual-feed antenna is used for both vertical (V) and horizontal (H) polarization. Two feeders are needed per antenna for the use of V and H polarization.
7.4
RF Branching Network
The typical RF branching network arrangement for N+1 single-feed operation, N+1 alternate operation and 2x(N+1), co-channel operation are shown in Fig.32, Fig.33, Fig.34, Fig.35, Fig.36 and Fig.37.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
67
68
C/W CI CI CI CI CI CI CI
V(H)
Main antenna
CI
CI
B B B B DUP
CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
B B
B B B B B B
B B
B B
BEF Transmit side Receive side
CH4 CH2
BE
CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1
CH8 CH6
CH7 CH5
Transmit side
Receive side
Fig.32 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation (Main Antenna Part)
Note: BP: BEF: W/C: CIR:
band pass filter Band elimination filter Waveguide/coaxial adapter Circulator
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
CI CI C/W
CI CI CI
V (H)
SD antenna
B B B B B B
CH5 CH7 CH6 CH8
B B
BEF Receive side

CH2 CH4
CH1 CH3
Receive side
Fig.33 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation (Space Diversity Antenna Part)
Note: BP: BEF: W/C: CIR:
band pass filter Band elimination filter Waveguide/coaxial adapter Circulator
69
70
C/W CIR CIR CIR
H(V)
Main antenna V (H)
CIR
CIR
BP BP DUP BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
BEF
CH8 CH6
CH4 CH2
CH8CH6
CH4CH2
Transmit side C/W CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
Receive side
BP BP DUP
CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
BEF
Transmit side
CH7CH5 CH3CH1
Fig.34 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation (Main Antenna Part)
Note: BP: band pass filter BEF: Band elimination filter C/W: Coaxial/waveguide adapter CIR: Circulator
Receive side
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
CIR CIR C/W
CIR
H(V)
SD antenna
BP BP
BP BP
V(H)
CH2 CH4
CH6 CH8
Receive side CIR CIR BP BP CIR C/W
BP BP
BEF
CH1 CH3
CH5 CH7
Fig.35 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation (Main Antenna Part)
Receive
Note: BP: Band pass filter BEF: Band elimination filter C/W: Coaxial/waveguide adapter CIR: Circulator
71
72
C/W CIR CIR BP BP CIR CIR CIR CIR
V(H)
CIR
CIR
CIR
Main antenna V (H)
BP BP BP BP DUP
CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
H(V)
BEF Receive side
CH4 CH2
BEF
Transmit side
CH8 CH6
CH7 CH5
CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1
Transmit side C/W CIR CIR CIR CIR
Receive side
CIR BP BP
CIR
CIR
CIR
CIR
BP BP DUP
BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
BP BP
BEF
CH4 CH2x CH3 CH1x
CH8xCHx6 CHx7 CH5x
BEF Receive side

CH4x CH2x CH3x CH1x
Transmit side
CH8 CH6x CH7 CH5x
Transmit side
Note: BP: band pass filter BEF: Band elimination filter W/C: Waveguide/coaxial adapter CIR: Circulator
Fig.36 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-ChannelOperation (Main Antenna Part)
Receive side
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
CIR CIR C/W BF BF BF BF BF BF
CIR
CIR
CIR
V (H)
SD antenna
BF BF
H (V)
BEF
CH5 CH7 CH6 CH8
Receive side
CH2 CH4
CH1 CH3
Receive side
CIR
CIR
CIR
CIR
CIR
C/W
BF BF
BF BF
BF BF
BF BF
BEF
CH1x CH3x CH2x CH4x
CH5x CH7x CH6x CH8x
Fig.37 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation (Main Antenna Part)
Receive side
Receive side
73
74
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Section 2. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION
EQUIPMENT SIGNAL FLOW
8.1
General
Fig.38, Fig.39 and Fig.40 show the functional block diagram of TL SDH microwave radio system. TL SDH radio is composed of four (4) functional blocks, base band signal Interface, supervisory/control & switching unit block (SCSU), main signal transmission unit block (MSTU), RF branching network unit block (BRU) and user interface area block (UIA).
8.2
Signal Interface
Two (2) types of STM-1 baseband interface unit are available, one is BSW for electrical interface, the other is OPT BSW for optical interface. For STM-1 optical interface, only OPT BSW should be plug-in'ed instead of BSW on the SCSU block And also unit mixture of STM-1 electrical and optical interface is available in a same rack. There are two (2) types of optical interface units (OPT BSW1/OPT BSW2) depending on the required transmission optical path distance (*1). The OPT BSW unit contains the optical-to-electrical/electrical-to-optical conversion (O-E/E-O CONV) circuit and bipolar switch for the protection of MSTU failure. (*1): OPT BSW1 for code S-1.1(<25 km), OPT BSW2 for L-1.1(<45 km). In the Optical-to-Electrical (O-E CONV) circuit, the incoming STM-1 optical signal is converted to CMI (Coded Mark Inversion) data and sent to the MSTU unit via the BSW. In the received side, the CMI data signals from the BSW are converted to STM-1 optical interface signals by the electrical to optical (E-O CONV) circuit. In case of STM-1 optical interface, OPT BSW has not the provision of multiplex section protection (MSP) function between system "X" and system "Y" by monitoring K1 and K2 bytes and the alarm information from the OPT BSW in the terminal.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
75
8.3
SCSU Block
The SCSU unit has seven (7) types of functional units, that is, supervisory/ control & switching unit (SV), bipolar switch (BSW/OPT BSW), timing control unit (TCU), embedded communication unit (ECU), house keeping unit (HK), occasional traffic unit (OCC INTF/OPT OCC) and inter-shelf connection unit (BSW INTF). The SCSU has interface functions for STM-1 baseband signal, housekeeping signal, order wire, wayside traffic, digital service channel, network management system and signal synchronization. There are three (3) non-fuse breakers on SCSU block, one for SV unit, one for TCU1 unit and one for TCU2 unit.
8.4
MSTU Block
The MSTU has five (5) functional sections: STM-1 electrical interface (SE INTF), modulator (MOD), transmitter (TX), receiver (RX) and demodulator (DEM). An STM-1 electrical interface is available on the MSTU without any interface unit. The STM-1 electrical interface (SE INTF) is used for intra-office connection with other SDH equipment, and is composed of CMI-to-Unipolar and Unipolar-to-CMI conversion (CMI/U-C CONV) and 155 Mbit/s digital processing (TDP/RDP) circuits. In the CMI-to-Unipolar conversion (C-U CONV) circuit, incoming 155 Mbit/s electrical interface signal is converted to the six (6) unipolar data signal after speed/ serial-to-parallel conversion and sent to the transmit digital processing (TPD) circuit. The TDP circuit receives the six (6) unipolar data signals from C-U CONV circuit and extracts the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) and the regenerator section overhead (RSOH) bits to be terminated from the STM-1 data stream. After extraction, the circuit inserts a new MSOH/RSOH bits into the data signals and completes STM-1 data signals with pointer processing. The data signals are re-synchronized using the clock signal from the timing clock source unit (TCU) in this circuit, and the signals are sent to the MOD section through the USW circuit. The unipolar switch (U SW) of transmit side does the parallel transmission between any of main channels and protection channel when a main channel degrades due to fading. The MOD section has two functions, coder (CODER) and modulator (MOD). CODER circuit does the D/A conversion for multi-state modulation and also insertion of additional bits such as radio frame complementary overhead bits (RFCOH) and scrambling of the data signals. CODER circuit also includes the processing of forward error correction called multi-level coded modulation (MLCM). Using MCLM method, high spectrum utilization and high coding gain can be achieved. The modulator (MOD) circuit accepts unipolar data signals and clock from the coder circuit. In case of 64 QAM MLCM, six (6) processed unipolar data signals (*3) are converted to two eight (8) -level base band signals by the D/A converter. The two converted 8-level base band signals are sent to the root-Nyquist low-pass filter circuits having 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor(*4) to shape the base band waveform. The two (2) filtered 8-level base band signals are fed to the IF section. (*3): Seven (7) data for 128QAM, (*4): 25% for 128QAM with 29/29.5 MHz and 18% with 28 MHz RF channel spacing In the IF section, the IF (70MHz) local signal is generated and used to give two (2) orthogonal carriers. The two 8-level base band signals are amplitude- modulated on each orthogonal carrier using a high-precision linear modulator. The transmitter (TX) section accepts IF (70MHz) modulated 64 or 128 QAM signal from the IF modulator, and performs 1st IF-to-2PndP IF(800MHz band) and 2PndP IF-to-RF frequency up-conversion. The 64 or 128 QAM modulated RF signal is power amplified up to +29/32dBm (except 11/13GHz band) by GaAs FET class AB high power amplifiers with predistorter and automatic level control circuits and fed to the transmit RF branching network (BRU).
76
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
The transmit local carrier supply employs RF oscillator with a crystal controlled PLL using high precision synthesizer circuit. Transmit local frequency is tunable with half-band frequency coverage of the specified RF band.(For 11/13GHz, quarter-band coverage) The received RF signal from the antenna is fed to the receive RF branching network where it is separated from the transmitted signal and bandpass filtered to suppress unwanted interference. In the main receiver, the modulated RF signal is amplified by a super low noise High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT) RF amplifier. The amplified RF signal is down-converted to IF (844 MHz/70 MHz) and amplified to a specified level by the Automatic Gain Controlled IF amplifier (AGC AMP) and equalized for group delay and amplitude response due to static transmit-receive overall transmission line. The IF signal is sent to the IF demodulator. As a countermeasures against severe path conditions, Space Diversity (SD) is fitted as standard and is enabled by the network management as a "provisioning" item. In the SD receiver, RF signal from the SD antenna is down-converted to an IF signal using the same method as in the main receiver. The SD IF signal is combined in-phase with the main IF signal using endless phase shifter under the control of the SD combiner control circuit. The receive local frequency carrier supply is the same as that of transmit local frequency carrier supply. Receive local oscillator signal is supplied for both the main receiver and SD receiver. The demodulator unit is composed of demodulator (DEM), full digital transversal equalizer (TVE) with decision feedback equalizer (DFE) and decoder (DECODER). In case of 64 QAM MLCM, the demodulator (DEM) accepts the modulated IF signal from the receiver. The demodulation method is coherent detection and instantaneous decision to recover two (2) 8-level base band signals. The two detected 8-level base band signals are sent to the root Nyquist low-pass filter circuits. These base band filter have 35% raised cosine roll-off factor to minimize the inter-symbol interference due to multipath fading. The received signals (I-CH and Q-CH) from the filter are amplified and fed to A/D converters. The two (2) 8-level analog data streams are multi-level discriminated with the clock signals. The data are then regenerated to six (6) digital data signals and sent to the full digital transversal equalizer (TVE) with decision feedback equalizer (DFE). The clock signal is also recovered from the modulated IF signal. It is fed to the decision circuit, transversal equalizer and digital processing circuit. The 11-tap linear type transversal equalizer (TVE) with 10-tap decision feed back equalizer (DFE) is fabricated in LSI. It is a sophisticated adaptive equalizer used as a powerful countermeasure to multi-path fading distortion. The TVE/DFE equalizes waveform distortion due to multi-path fading and also transmission line distortion in the base band time domain. The decoder (DECODER) circuit decodes the MLCM. This circuit receives six (6) data signals (7 data for 128QAM) and a clock signal from the transversal equalizer. The data signals are decoded and error correction is performed. The regenerated six (6) unipolar data signals and clock signal are sent to the RDP circuit via the USW after digital signal processing such as descrambling of the data signals. The unipolar switch (USW) of receive side has DADE (Differential Absolute Delay time Equalization) function to align the time difference between protection channel and any of main channels automatically and performs errorless switchover in the unipolar stage satisfactorily. The RDP circuit extracts RSOH/MSOH and RFCOH bits and inserts new RSOH/MSOH bits into the data signals and completes the STM-1 data signals with pointer processing. The data signals are resynchronized by network reference clock signal from timing clock source (TCU) and the signals are sent to the SCSU block. The RDP circuit in the receiver side performs the inverse procedure as the TDP circuit and sends the processed data signals to the Unipolar to CMI Converter circuit. A powerful Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) using a 11-tap transversal filter is used for cochannel operation on the same RF frequency and is configured inside the MSTU. XPIC function is fitted as standard and is enabled by the network management as a "provisioning" item.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
77
8.5
BRU Block
The RF branching network unit has RF filters (BPF and/or BEF), circulators and duplexer for RF signal combination/branching and interface to/from antenna system. RF branching network arrangement of each RF channel is loss equalized type as standard and RF filter is two (2) channel pair type, that is, CH1-CH3 and CH5- CH7 for odd RF channel and CH2-CH4 and CH6-CH8 for even RF channel.
8.6
UIA
There are connectors for auxiliary signal interface and DC power terminals in this UIA blocks. There are two (2) DC power terminals for dual-feed supply from system-X and system-Y DC power lines.
78
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
DUP TDP STM-1 CMI Prot CH RDP USW DEM RX BPF USW MOD TX BPF
STM -1 Electrical In/out Main 1 STM-1 CMI WS R,S UC(F1) BSW TDP USW
MST U
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
Main 2 STM-1 CMI WS R,S UC(F1)
BSW
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
BSW
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU UC(F1) WS R,S BRU
To/from Main N STM-1 CMI RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E EOW 4W (E1,E OSSI (X25/Q Housekeeping DO
Unipolar Data
NOTE -1 : BRU : MSTU : SCSU :
RF Branching Network Unit Block Main Signal Transmission Unit Baseband signal interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit B lock
FLEXR EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN WebEQPT CLK MON LT SCSU
Fig.38 - Functional Block Diagram for STM-1 electrical interface
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
79
TDP Prot CH STM CMI -1
USW MOD TX DEM RX
DUP BPF BPF
RDP USW
STM -1 Optical In/out Main1 STM -1 S -1.1 WS R,S UC(F1) TDP OPT BSW TDP
MSTU
USW MOD TX DEM RX
BPF BPF
RDP USW
MSTU
Main 2 STM -1 S -1.1 WS R,S UC(F1)
OPT BSW
USW MOD TX DEM RX
BPF BPF
RDP USW
MSTU
Main 3 STM -1 S -1.1 WS R,S UC(F1)
OPT BSW
TDP
USW MOD TX DEM RX
BPF BPF
RDP USW
To/from Main N STM CMI -1 RUC 1 EOW 2W (E1, EOW 4W (E1, OSSI (X25/ Housekeeping DO
Unipolar Data
NOTE -1 : BRU : MSTU : SCSU :
RF Branching Network Unit Block Main Signal Tra smission Unit n Baseband Signal Interface, S upervisoryControl& / Switching UnitBlock
FLEXR EXT CLK OU EXT CLK I EQPT CLK MO Web LT SCSU
Fig.39 - Functional Block Diagram for STM-1 optical interface without MSP
80
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
DUP TDP Prot CH STM-1 CMI RDP USW DEM RX BPF USW MOD TX BPF
STM -1 Optical In/out BSW Main 1 STM-1 CMI WS R,S UC(F1) RDP USW TDP USW
MSTU
MOD TX
BPF
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
BSW Main 2 STM-1 CMI WS R,S UC(F1)
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
Main 3 STM-1 S-1.1 WS R,S UC(F1)
OPT BSW
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
To/from Main N STM-1 CMI RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E EOW 4W (E1,E OSSI (X25/Q Housekeeping DO
Unipolar Data
NOTE -1 : BRU: MSTU: SCSU:
RF Branching Network Unit Block Main Signal Transmission Unit Baseband Signal Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block
FLEXR EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON Web LT SCSU
Fig.40 - Functional Block Diagram for the unit mixture of STM-1 electrical/optical interface
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
81
STM-1 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION
9.1
STM-1 Electrical Signal Interface
SCSU Block
The STM-1 Electrical signal input/output terminals are located on the front panel of BSW (Bipolar Switch) unit of SCSU (Baseband interface unit, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit) block. Input/output terminals for STM-1 optical interface is also located on the front panel of OPT BSW unit. OPT BSW units is installed on SCSU block as an option instead of BSW unit.
9.2
Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function)
The MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) is composed of Transmitter (TX), Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1 Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions. The Unipolar Switch (USW) for Radio Protection System (RPS) is also a part of the MSTU.
SE INTF
The STM-1 CMI signal is introduced from the BSW/OPT BSW unit of SCSU block. The incoming STM-1 CMI signal is converted to eight (8) streams of unipolar signal and applied to the Transmit Data Processing (TDP) circuit.
TDP
The TDP circuit processes drop/insert of the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) to be terminated from the STM-1 data. The AU-Pointer is also re-written. A Unipolar Switch (USW) is provided to performs hitless switch for the Radio Protection System. After the USW, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is applied to the incoming STM-1 signal to compose the Radio Frame. The RFCOH is composed of Radio Frame Alignment, Wayside, Radio Service Channel, RPS Control, Redundancy bit for MLCM and other signals. Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) is provided to perform forward error correction on the data transmission across radio section.
QAM MOD Module

The Radio Frame is introduced to the QAM Modulator Module (QAM MOD Module). The QAM MOD Module is composed of a spectrum shaping device and a Modulator controller (MOD), the Digital to analog converter (D/A) and the Quadrature Amplitude Modulator (QAM) to generate the QAM signal. The output of QAM MOD Module is applied to the Transmit IF (TIF) circuit.
82
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
TIF
The incoming QAM signal is converted to the 1st IF (70MHz) signal. The 1st IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then applied to the Linearizer (LNZ). The LNZ works to compensate the distortion which caused by non-linearity of the RF transmit circuit. The 1st IF signal is converted to the 2nd IF (844MHz) signal and then applied to the Transmit RF Module (TRF Module).
TRF Module
The TRF accepts the 2nd IF band signal and converts to the Radio Frequency (RF) band signal by mixing with the output signal from the Local Oscillator Module (LO Module). The RF signal is amplified by RF amplifiers. The output level of MSTU is +29 dBm/;32 dBm (high power version) (+29 dBm for 11 GHz and + 27 dBm for 13 GHz) is controlled by Automatic Level Control (ALC) to maintain constant against the variation in input signal level, amplifier gain and other ambient factors. Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) can control the MSTU output power between +29 dBm (HIGH) and +19 dBm (LOW) or +32 dBm (HIGH) and +22 dBm (LOW) automatically according to the receiving signal level (RSL) of far end radio station. ATPC controls the MSTU output level to "HIGH" automatically when the RX receiving level becomes lower than the "Provisioning" setting level by Web LT. This function is provided to save the power consumption of radio equipment and improve the radio frequency interferences to the other radio system. The output of MSTU is applied to the Branching Network Unit (BRU) and then to the antenna. The spurious emission of transmitter is eliminated by the Band-Pass Filter (BPF) of BRU.
LO Module
The LO Module is a phase locked loop oscillator circuit to supply RF Local carrier signals to the transmitter and receiver. The oscillation frequency is to be set according to the RF operation frequency of MSTU.
RRF Module
The Receive RF Module (RRF Module) accepts the received RF signal from the antenna through BRU. The selectivity of receiver is determined by the BPF of BRU The received RF signal (standard level: - 35 dBm, AGC dynamic range: - 17 dBm to - 77 dBm) is amplified by a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) and then converted to the 2nd IF (844MHz) signal. The 2nd IF signal is amplified and applied to the Receive IF (RIF) circuit.
RIF
The 2nd IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier and then converted to the 1st IF (70MHz) signal. The 1st IF signal is applied to the DEM circuit. IF amplifier is Automatic Gain Controlled (AGC) amplifier to maintain the 1st IF output level constant against the large variation of RF receiving level at MSTU input. AGC current of Main 1 channel can be monitored through the connector on UIA block for propagation testing and maintenance purposes. The Mixer (MIX) converts the 1st IF signal down to the QAM signal and applies to the QAM Demodulator Modulate (QAM DEM Module).
QAM DEM Module

The QAM DEM Module is composed of QAM demodulator (DEM), Analog to Digital Converter (A/D), the Demodulator controller (DEM CONT), spectrum shaping (Roll-off FIL) device and Transversal Equalizer (TVE) with Decision Feedback Equalizer (DFE). The spectrum shaping device shares spectrum shaping function with the QAM MOD Module of the transmitter side.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
83
The TVE with DFE is baseband time domain equalizer and equalizes waveform distortion caused by multipath fading. The radio frame baseband clock signal is recovered from the received IF signal by the QAM DEM Module. The output of QAM DEM Module are baseband signals in radio frame and clock signal and sent to the Receive Data Processing (RDP) circuit.
RDP
The first stage of RDP is the MLCM decoder. Forward error correction is carried out by checking redundancy bits contained in the radio frame. Radio parity (RP) bits before error correction and a part of MLCM redundancy bits are detect to monitor the error performance across the radio section from modulator to demodulator. RP bit error ratio deterioration (BER-ALM) is one of automatic USW operation factors. Another automatic operation factor of USW is frame synchronization loss (LOF) of the radio frame. The USW is uni-directional switch and perform hitless switching for fade. Drop/insert of MSOH and RSOH and AU-Pointer rewriting are carried out and eight (8) streams of unipolar signal are converted to an STM-1 CMI signal and sent out to the BSW unit of SCSU. The BSW is bi-directional switch and performs hit switch for equipment failure. Fig.41 shows the main signal flow of STM-1 Electrical Interface equipment. Fig.41 shows the main signal flow of STM-1 Electrical Interface equipment without SD (Space Diversity) as an example.
84
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
DUP TDP Prot CH STM -1 Electrical In/out Main 1 STM-1 CMI WS R,S UC(F1) RDP USW DEM RX BPF BSW TDP USW STM-1 CMI USW MOD TX BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
MOD TX
BPF
MSTU
BSW
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
Main 3 STM-1 CMI WS R, S UC(F1)
BSW
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU BRU UC(F1) WS R,S
To/from Main N STM-1 CMI RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2 EOW 4W (E1,E2 OSSI (X25/Q3 Housekeeping D DO
Unipolar data
NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Baseband, Supervisory /Control & Switching Unit
FLEXR Web LT EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON SCSU
Fig.41 - Main signal flow of STM-1 Electrical Interface Terminal
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
85
9.3
Space Diversity
As a counter measure to severe propagation path conditions, Space Diversity (SD) reception is provided as standard. Space diversity circuit is fitted as standard and enabled by software (Provisioning setting by Web LT). Fig.42 shows the diagram of RF/IF section of MSTU applied for SD reception.
From SD Antenna To/from Main Antenna
DUP MOD MIX IFA LNZ MIX FIL MIX AMP BPF
TXPLO 1st IF LOC 2nd IF EPS MIX AMP RXPL MIX RF LOC
BPF
DEM
MIX
DELAY EQL
HYB
LNA
BPF
MSTU Prot
IF DADE
MIX
AMP
MIX
LNA
BPF
MOD
MIX
IFA LNZ
MIX
FIL
MIX
AMP
TXPLO 1st IF LOC 2nd IF EPS MIX AMP RXPL MIX RF LOC
DEM
MIX
DELAY EQL
HYB
LNA
BPF
MSTU Main 1
IF DADE
MIX
AMP
MIX
LNA
BPF
BRU MOD : Modulator IFA : IF Amplifier LNZ : Linearizer MIX : Mixer FIL : Filter AMP : RF Amplifier EPS : Endless Phase Shifter
LNA : HYB : IF DADE :
Low Noise Amplifier Hybrid as IF Combiner Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer (adjustable)
DELAY EQL: Delay Equalizer (adjustable) DEM : Demodulator LOC : Local Oscillator TX/RX PLO: Phase Locked Loop Oscillator
Fig.42 - Diagram of Space Diversity Reception
86
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
The SD system generally has two antennas, the upper and lower. The Main antenna (upper) is used for transmission and reception commonly. The SD antenna (lower) is used only for reception. The MSTU is equipped with two sets of receivers, one receiver (Main receiver) is connected to the Main antenna and the other (SD receiver) is connected to the SD antenna. Two receiver outputs are combined together after phase synchronization each other. Phase synchronization is achieved by controlling the 2nd IF local carrier to SD receiver through the Endless Phase Shifter (EPS). The combining ratio of two receiver outputs is controlled algorithmically to optimize the transmission performance. The SD system can improve the Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) up to 2 to 3 dB during the stable propagation condition period and significantly reduce the outage probability due to multi-path fading.
9.4
MSTU Front Panel
Fig.43 shows the front panel of MSTU unit and Table 2.1 shows the functions of MSTU front panel. Tab.28 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel No 1 2 3 4 5 Item FAN FAN PWR POWER ON/OFF TX LO MON 70M IN Function Cooling 4 fans for transmitter Power cable connector for cooling fans DC power supply switch for MSTU unit Monitor terminal for TX local frequency 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operationOUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the FLEXR 70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD antenna reception DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference Delay equalizer for branching network XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only) Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a Web LT for maintenance Alarm/status indicator: Normal = greena, Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking Normal = green a., Line failure = red on
REF I/O 70M OUT MN 70M OUT SD DADE D-EQL XPIC OUT (Master) XPIC IN (Slave) INCR DECR ITEM No LED indicator UNIT/RCI LINE
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 a.
Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via Web LT
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
87
FAN 1
FAN PWR 2
70M IN
ON POWER ON/OFF 3
REF I/O 6 MN 70M OUT 7 SD
OF F DADE 8
D-EQL TX F MON 4
XPIC OUT 10 XPIC IN INCR DECR ITEM No. 11 Factory use only. ITEM No. must be 0 for normal operation. 12
UNIT/RCI 13 LINE
Fig.43 - Front Panel of MSTU unit
88
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
9.5
Upper View of MSTU Adapter
RF output/input connectors to/from MSTU unit are located at the upper part of each MSTU unit. These connectors are mounted on the MSTU plug-in adapter as an intermediate device. Fig.44 shows the upper view of MSTU adapter.
SMA Coaxial Connector
TX
RX
SD
TX port: Transmitter output RX: port: Main RX input SD port: SD RX inpu
Fig.44 - Upper View of MSTU adapter
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
89
10
OW/UC/RUC/WS SIGNAL TRANSMISSION
In addition to the main signal (STM-1 signal), TL radio has the function to transmit several auxiliary signals. Some signals are accessible for user's utilization through the connectors in user interface area (UIA) block of SCSU. Some signals are exclusively used by the TL to control the TL system itself. This chapter describes auxiliary signals for user's utilization as follows.
Transmitted by STM-1 SOH (Section Overhead)

Two Engineering Orderwires per system One User Channel per STM-1 One Wayside Traffic per STM-1 (see 3.4 Wayside Traffic)
Transmitted by RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead)

Two User Channels per system One Wayside Traffic per STM-1.
10.1
Engineering Orderwire (OW)
The TL provides two engineering orderwires. One is transmitted by E1 byte of RSOH (Regenerator Section OH), the other one is transmitted by E2 byte of MSOH (Multiplex Section OH). Generally the orderwire by E1 is used for omnibus and E2 for express. Voice frequency signals of two orderwire by E1 and E2 are independent and have no mutual communication between the two.
To other 4W interface LINE side RPS1-M1 E1 byte(R- RPS1-PRT SOH) Analog voice additio DTM call Detectio Voice additio LED buzzer, , contact point
Ring back Ringer 2W INTF External (2W)
-M1 RADIO side RPS1 RPS1 -PRT E1 byte(RSOH) RPS1 -M1 LINE side -PRT E2 byte (M- RPS1 SOH) RPS1 -M1 RADIO side RPS1 -PRT E2 byte(MSOH)
Fig.45 - Signal flow of orderwire 90
Analog voice additio
DTM call Detectio
Voice additi
Ring back Ringer 2W INTF 4W interface ? PCM
External (2W) To other
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
10.2
User Channel (UC)
A User Channel (UC) of 64 kb/s per RF channel is prepared for user's data communication. This user channel is transmitted by F1 byte of RSOH. The interface circuit of user channel is Bipolar Switch (BSW) units in SCSU. User Channels are protected by the RPS (USW and BSW).
In/Out port MSTU Prot Prot 64 kb/ Main 1 Main 2 Main N To/from Oth er Station Main 1 Main 2 Main N
BSW units Main 1 in Main 2 SCSU Main N
MSTU Main 1
Fig.46 - Signal flow of user channel (F1)
10.3
Radio User Channel (RUC)
Two Radio User Channels (RUC) per system are provided to transmit voice frequency signals (VF) or 64 kb/s data for user's utilization. The RUCs are transferred by the Radio Frame Complementary OH. Two channels of RUC are transmitted by the Main 1 and Protection channel in parallel for duplication. At the receive side, one of RUC set is selected VF or 64 kb/s digital interface is selectable by mounting sub-modules on the SV unit.
In/out port RUC #1, #2 VF/64 kb/s #1 SV unit in SCSU MSTU Main 1 RUC #1, #2 MSTU Prot Prot To/from Other Station Main 1
VF/64 kb/s #2
Fig.47 - Signal flow of radio user channel
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
91
10.4
Wayside Traffic (WS)
The TL radio provides two (2) Wayside Traffics (WS, 2.048 Mb/s each) per STM-1. One of two Wayside traffics (WS SOH) is transmitted by the undefined national usage byte on SOH, another Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH) is transmitted on the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead. The interface circuit of Wayside traffics (WS SOH and WS RFCOH) is the BSW/OPT BSW unit of SCSU. Input/output port connectors are located on the front panel of BSW/OPT BSW unit for 75 ohms unbalanced or multi-pin connector on user interface area (UIA) block for120-ohm balanced interface. Interface conditions of input/output port are set by software setting. Wayside signals are protected by the RPS (USW and BSW).
MSTU Prot
Prot
WS (SOH) Main 1 WS (RFCOH) BSW/ OPT BSW MSTU Main 1 Main 1 To/from Other Station BSW/OPT BSW WS (RFCOH) MSTU Main 2
WS (SOH) Main 2 Main 2
WS (SOH) Main N WS (RFCOH) BSW/OPT BSW MSTU Main N Main N
Fig.48 - Signal flow of wayside traffic
10.5
Digital Communication Channel (DCC)
Digital Communication Channels (DCCs) are provided for the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) signal transmission. For the details of DCC, see paragraph "13.4 Supervisory (SV) unit".
92
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
11
OVERHEAD BIT ACCESS FOR TL SYSTEM
The SIAE TL uses three kinds of overhead bit to transfer the signals for system supervisory/control & switching and user's utilization. In addition to the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) of STM1 frame, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is provided between two MSTUs across a radio hop. Fig.49 shows access points of MSOH, RSOH and RFCOH.
SDH Radio System
SDH Optical System
Terminal
Repeater
Terminal Terminal
Terminal
Radio Frame RS MS
Radio Frame RS RS MS RS
RFCOH RSOH MSOH RS MS RFCOH RSOH MSOH
RFCOH RSOH
RFCOH RSOH MSOH
RSOH MSOH
R S OH
RSOH MSOH
: : : : :
Regenerator Section Multiplex Section Radio Frame Complementary Overhead Regenerator Section Overhead of STM-1 Multiplex Section Overhead of STM-1
Fig.49 - SDH radio overhead bit access Note: In case that radio repeater is set to "RS" by provisioning, only RFCOH byte is accessible.
11.1
MSOH and RSOH
The Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) are compatible with SDH fiber optical system in accordance with ITU-T G. 707. The MSOH are dropped/inserted at terminal stations of multiplex section mode and the RSOH are dropped/ inserted at terminal/repeater stations of multiplex/regenerator section mode. Fig.50 shows the STM-1 frame format and overhead bit assignment.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
93
Tab.29 shows the function of MSOH, RSOH, Pointer and Path Overhead (POH).
270 Bytes 9 Bytes
RSOH 9 Rows Pointer Payload MSOH
RSOH Pointer
MSOH
A1 B1 D1 H1-1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1
A1 A2 A1 A2 WS WS E1 WS WS WS D2 H1-2 H1-3 H2-1 H2-2 B2 WS K1 B2 WS WS WS D5 WS WS WS D8 WS WS WS D11 Z1 Z2 Z1 Z2
J0 F1 D3 H2-3 H3-1 WS K2 WS D6 WS D9 WS D12 M1 E2
A2
WS WS WS H3-2 H3-3 WS WS WS WS WS WS WS WS WS
WS WS
J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 Z3 Z4 Z5 POH
MSOH, RSOH and Pointer
WS
: Wayside traffic transmission using media specific usage bytes, national usage bytes and a part of reserved bytes for future international standardization : Reserved for future international standardization
Fig.50 - STM-1 Frame Format Construction
94
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.29 - Main Function of Section Overhead (ITU-T G.707) Overhead Byte Abbreviation A1, A2 Usage Function 6 bytes are used for STM-1 frame synchronization. The pattern is A1A1A1A2A2A2 to each STM-1 frame, A1 = 11110110, A2 = 00101000 12 bytes are used for Telecommunication Management Network (TMN). D1 to D3 are communication for Regenerator Section. D4 to D12 are communication for Multiplex Section
Framing
D1 to D12
Data Communication Channels
JO
Regenerator Sec- One byte is unique number assigned to an STM-1 signal tion Trace for identification in aggregated STM-N level Two bytes are used for voice frequency transmission as engineering orderwire. E1 are communication for Regenerator Section. E2 are communication for Multiplex Section One byte is reserved for user purposes. A User Channel (SOH) is to be transmitted Bit Interleaved Parity 8 One byte is used to monitor the error performance of Regenerator Section Bit Interleaved Parity 24 Three bytes are used to monitor the error performance of Multiplex Section Two bytes are allocated for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) switching control One byte is used for quality control of the synchronous clock signal One byte is allocated to transmit the block error information to the far end Four bytes are reserved as spare Administration Unit (AU) pointer bits are used for Section Adaptation (SA). SS bit Sending side H1: 00/10/01/11 selectable Y1 (H1#2): same as H1 Y2 (H1#3): same as H1 Receiving side H1: 00/10/01/11 selectable Y1 (H1#2): XX (no use) Y2 (H1#3): XX (no use) Note: H1 is set to same value for sending and receiving side.
E1, E2
Orderwire
SOH
F1
User channel
B1
BIP-8
B2
BIP-24
K1, K2 S1 M1 Z1, Z2
APS channel Synchronous status Far end block error Spare
Pointer
H1 to H3
Pointer bit
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
95
11.2
RFCOH
The TL organizes the Radio Frame for the transmission between the two Main Signal Transmission Units (MSTU) across a radio hop. The Radio Frame is composed of the STM-1 signal and Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH). The Radio Frame has two types of configuration according to the modulation system, 64 QAM and 128 QAM. 64 QAM: 6 streams of 28.512 Mb/s 128 QAM: 7 streams of 24.192 Mb/s
The Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) transfer two categories of signal and a number of dummy bit. One is exclusively internal use for the monitoring/controlling of TL system and the other is for user's utilization.
Signals for internal use of TL system

FA: Frame Alignment bit to maintain the frame synchronization of radio frame (36 bits = 288 kb/s for 64 QAM, 42 bits = 336 kb/s for 128 QAM ). C1: Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) level 1 (1184 bits = 9472 kb/s for 64 QAM, 1004 bits = 8032 kb/s for 128 QAM). C2: Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) level 2. Radio parity for the error performance across radio section before error correction is checked by this signal (296 bits = 2368 kb/s for 64 QAM, 251 bits = 2008 kb/s for 128 QAM). BSCS (RSC*): Baseband Switch Control Signal to control the Radio Protection System (RPS) (32 bits = 256 kb/s). RID1 to RID4: Route identifier for radio section (4 bits = 32 kb/s). ATPC: Automatic Transmit Power Control signal (6 bits = 56 kb/s) 1BE/X1BE: Transfer bit for 1 Bit Error (2 bits = 16 kb/s). FMS/XFMS: Transfer bit for Frequency Measurement (2 bits = 16 kb/s). OOS/XOOS: Transfer bit for Out of Service (OOS) (2 bits = 16 kb/s).
Signals for user's utilization

WSRF: Wayside traffic by RFCOH (264 bits = 2112 kb/s) RUC (RSC*): Radio User Channel (16 bits = 128 kb/s)
Note: RSC* (Radio Service Channel, 108 bits = 864 kb/s) is composed of BSCS, RUC, unused bits and stuff bits to be transmitted duplicated by the Main 1 and Protection channel only. Fig.51, Fig.52 and Fig.53 shows the detailed Radio Frame structure.
96
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Frame Structure of 64QAM-155M Radio System 270 bytes
9 byte RSOH Payload
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

MSOH 2,430 bits(19,440 Mbit/s) 1st row 2nd row 3rd row 8th row 9th row ? c . Super frame (3,564 bits/28.512 Mbit/s) First Sub Frame Second Sub Frame 1,776 bits/148 word frame) 6 bits : Overhead bit
147th w ord 148th w ord
After speed conversion and serial-parallel conversion
9 rows
POINTER
8 bits
261 bits 9 bits
6 bits
Fig.51 - Radio Frame Structure of 64QAM System

1st word 2nd word
1,776 bits/148 word frame)
6 bits
6 bits ? c . 12 bits
: Frame bit
97
Bit Arrangement from 1st to 82th word 0 1 2 3 6 12 17 23 29 34 40 46 50 56 62 7 13 18 24 30 35 41 47 51 57 63 8 14 19 25 31 36 42 48 52 58 64 9 15 20 26 32 37 43 49 53 59 65
4 10 16 21 27 33 38 44 b 54 60 C2 5 11 C1 22 28 C1 39 45 C1 55 61 C1
STM-1 data bit RFCOH bit (a): C1 redundancy bit: C2 redundancy bit:
66 bits 1 bit 4 bits 1 bits 72 bits
Bit Arrangement from 83st to 148th word 0 1 2 3 6 12 17 23 29 33 39 45 49 55 61 7 13 18 24 30 34 40 46 50 56 62 8 14 19 25 31 35 41 47 51 57 63 9 15 20 26 32 36 42 48 52 58 64 37 43 b 53 59 C2
4 10 16 21 27 a
5 11 C1 22 28 C1 38 44 C1 54 60 C1
STM-1 data bit RFCOH bit (a,b C1 redundancy bit: C2 redundancy bit:
65 bits 2 bits 4 bits 1 bits 72 bits
Fig.52 - Word Structure of 64QAM System
98
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Frame Structure of 128QAM-155M Radio System 270 bytes
9 bytes
RSOH Payload
9 rows
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

2,430 bits(19,440 Mbit/s) 2nd row 3rd row 8th row 9th row ? c . Super frame (3,024 bits/24,192 Mbit/s) First Sub Frame Second Sub Frame 1,512 bits/126 word frame) 6 bits 1,500 bits/125 word fram) 2nd word ? c . 125th word 126th word : Overhead bit : Frame bit
POINTER
MSOH
1st row
8 bits
261 bits
9 bits
After speed conversion and serial-parallel conversion
7 bits
Fig.53 - Radio Frame Structure of 128QAM System
6 bits
7 bits
1st word
12 bits
99
Bit Arrangement from 1st to 36th word (1st sub frame) Bit Arrangement from 1st to 35th word (2nd sub frame) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 20 27 34 40 47 54 59 66 73 15 21 28 35 41 48 55 60 67 74 16 22 29 36 42 49 56 61 68 75
10 17 23 30 37 43 50 57 62 69 76 11 18 24 31 38 44 51 58 63 70 77 12 19 25 32 39 45 52 b 64 71 C2
13 C1 26 33 C1 46 53 C1 65 72 C1
STM-1 data bits RFCOH bit (a): C1 redundancy bit: C2 redundancy bit:
78 bits 1 bit 4 bits 1 bits 84 bits
Bit Arrangement from 37st to 126th word Bit Arrangement from 36st to125th word 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 20 27 34 39 46 53 58 65 72 15 21 28 35 40 47 54 59 66 73 16 22 29 36 41 48 55 60 67 74
10 17 23 30 37 42 49 56 61 68 75 11 18 24 31 38 43 50 57 62 69 76 12 19 25 32 a 44 51 b 63 70 C2
13 C1 26 33 C1 45 52 C1 64 71 C1
STM-1 data bits RFCOH bit (a,b) C1 redundancy bit: C2 redundancy bit:
77 bits 2 bits 4 bits 1 bits 84 bits
Fig.54 - Word Structure of 128QAM System
100
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
12
RADIO PROTECTION SWITCH SYSTEM
TL radio has the function of Radio Protection Switch system (RPS) to maintain high signal transmission quality. Radio protection switch is activated for severe propagation path condition (occurance of multipath fading) and equipment failure. Manual switching is also available for regular testing and maintenance purposes.
12.1
Outline of Radio Protection Switching
Switching Capacity
One protection channel is provided for each switching group. Single-feed/Alternated operation: One group (RPS 1 = Group 1) having N + 1 switching capacity Co-channel operation: Two groups (RPS 1 = Group 1 and RPS 2 = Group 2) having N + 1 switching capacity, independently activation Double terminal operation: Two groups (RPS1 and RPS2) having max. 3+1 switching capacity for both A-B and B-C direction, independently
Maximum number of main channels is limited by the frequency band utilized (maximum 7 main channels per each group, N=maximum 7).
Switching Stage
The Radio Protection System has two stages of switch, one is bipolar switch (BSW) and the other is unipolar switch (USW). Fig.55 shows the outline of Radio Protection System.
Prot M ST U (USW) M ST U (USW Prot
Main 1 Main 2 Main 3 BB INTF BSW BB INTF BSW M ST U (USW) M ST U (USW BSW BB INTF
Main 1 Main 2 Main 3 BSW BB INTF
M ST U (USW)
M ST U (USW
BB INTF
BSW
M ST U (USW)
M ST U (USW
BSW
BB INTF
To/from Main N Unipolar signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal
To/from Main N Unipolar signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal
: Bipolar signal (CMI) line : Unipolar signal (19.44 Mb/s : Optional BB INTF BB INTF X 8) line =BB INTF+BSW )
circuit (OPT BSW
Fig.55 - Radio protection system
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
101
Switching Section
The switching section of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) System is activated on a hop basis, therefore protection switching is activated between stations despite of terminal station, repeater station and back-toback terminal station. Fig.56 shows the relationship between terminals and a repeater for the RPS switching section.
Terminal A UW S MT SU B B IN F T MT UW SU S
Repeater B UW S MT SU
Terminal C MT UW SU S
BSW
UW S MT SU
MT UW SU S
BSW
BSW
UW S MT SU
MT UW SU S
BSW
B B IN F T
B B IN F T
BSW
UW S MT SU
MT UW SU S
BSW
BSW
UW S MT SU
MT UW SU S
BSW
B B IN F T
U nipolar CMI To/from Main N
Unipolar CMI CMI To/from Main N
Unipolar
Unipolar CMI To/from Main N
Switching section A to B
Switching section B to C
Fig.56 - Switching section
OW/UC/WS Signal
The Radio Protection Switching of Orderwire, User Channel by SOH and Wayside traffic by SOH/RFCOH is linked to the operation of STM-1 main signal.
Co-channel/3+1 Double Terminal Operation

In case of Co-channel and double terminal operation, two independent Radio Protection Switching groups (RPS 1 and RPS 2) are configured according to the system requirement. RPS 1 and RPS 2 operate independently and no mutual protection switching is carried out between the two groups.
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

Supervising of switching status and manual switch operation are carried out through the Web based local craft terminal, Web LT. There is no display/ control panel for RPS equipped on the TL itself. The Web LT can supervise/control all TL equipment (NE = Network Element) within a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) group to which the local terminal is connected. The Web LT and SNMP manager can manage all TL equipment together with other communication equipment.
12.2
USW and BSW
The Radio Protection System has two stages of switch, bipolar switch (BSW) and unipolar switch (USW).
102
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
USW (Unipolar Switch)

The USW is a part of the digital transmit/receive processor (TDP/RDP) of MSTU. This switch has the manual/automatic DADEing (Differential Automatic time Delay Equalization) function between protection and any of main channels and performs the hitless (errorless) switching for fade. Detailed USW information is as follows: Signal level: Direction: Initiator: 8 streams of 19.44 Mb/s, Unipolar Uni-directional Auto revertive Loss of frame alignment (F LOSS) Signal degrade (BER ALM) 1 bit error detected (1BE, option setting)
BSW (Bipolar Switch)

A BSW unit per each main channel is mounted in the SCSU (Baseband interface, Supervisory Control & Switching Unit) block. In case of STM-1 optical interface, BSW should be replaced to OPT BSW. This BSW/ OPT BSW) switch is activated by equipment failure and perform hitless switching. Detailed BSW information is as follows: Signal level: Direction: Initiator: STM-1, CMI (Coded Mark Inversion) Bi-directional Auto revertive MSTU equipment alarm MSTU line failure alarm MSTU power supply failure
Fig.57 and Fig.58 show the function of USW and BSW.
Terminal A UW S TX R X UW S
Repeater B UW S T X R X
Terminal C UW S
B B IN F T
BSW
UW S
TX
R X
UW S
BSW
BSW
UW S
T X
R X
UW S
BSW
B B IN F T
UW S
R X
T X
UW S
UW S
R X
T X
UW S
B B IN F T
BSW
UW S
R X
T X
U W BSW S
BSW
UW S
R X
T X
U W BSW S
B B IN F T
Propagation failure
When propagation failure of Main 1 from repeater B to terminal A occurred, USWs (shaded) of one direction from B to A of Main 1 operate as shown above. Other switches are not affected at all. Fig.57 - Automatic operation of USW
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
103
Terminal A UW S TX R X UW S
Repeater B UW S T X R X
Terminal C UW S
B B IN F T
BSW
UW S
TX
R X
UW S
BSW
BSW
UW S
T X
R X
UW S
BSW
B B IN F T
UW S
R X
T X
UW S
UW S
R X
T X
UW S
B B IN F T
BSW
UW S
R X
T X
U W BSW S
BSW
UW S
R X
T UW X S
BSW
B B IN F T
Equipment Failure
When equipment failure of Main 1 terminal A (MSTU receiver) occured, BSWs (shaded) of both directions B and A of Main 1 operate as shown above. Fig.58 - Automatic operation of BSW
12.3
Switching Priority
The priority order of Radio Protection Switching is as follows: Tab.30 - Priority Order of RPS Operation Priority 1st 2nd Switching LOCKOUT FORCED Description Inhibits any type of RPS operation Switch over to Prot CH regardless the condition of the Main CH and Prot CH unless locked out The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH is free and normal. The priority order of automatic switching is listed below The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH by the command through Web LT, if Prot CH is free and normal Occasional traffic transmission (option) The lowest priority traffic is allowed to be transferred by Prot CH when Prot CH is free and normal
3rd
AUTOMATIC
4th
MANUAL
5th
OCC
104
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.31 - Priority Order of Automatic Protection Switching Priority Highest Switching operation BSW operation of Priority CH (default = Main 1) BSW operation of the channel first come BSW operation of the channel second come USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of Priority CH (default = Main 1) USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the channel first come USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the channel second come USW operation by BER ALM of Priority CH (default = Main 1) USW operation by BER ALM of the channel first come Lowest USW operation by BER ALM of the channel second come
12.4
Switching Initiator and Operation Time
Automatic protection of RPS is initiated by: Signal Failure: Signal Degrade: Frame alignment loss (F LOSS) of the Radio Frame Bit Error Ratio Alarm (BER ALM) or 1 bit error detection of radio parity before forward error correction.
Signal Failure (F LOSS alarm)

F LOSS alarm is initiated within 3 m seconds after losing frame synchronization and recovered within 3 m seconds after establishing synchronization.
Signal Degrade
The threshold level of BER ALM can be set through the Web LT as provisioning. Table 5.2 shows the setting position and time to initiate/recover of BER ALM. Default setting is "2". Tab.32 - BER ALM Initiation Setting and Time to Initiate/Restore BER ALM initiation before BER after Error correction Error correction 1 bit error 1x10-3 5x10-4 1x10-4 5x10-5 1x10-5 5x10-6 1x10-6 0 5X10-7 6x10-8 3x10-10 4x10-11 1x10-12 less Time to initiate (maximum) --0.25 ms 0.5 ms 2.5 ms 5.0 ms 25.0 ms 50.0 ms 250.0 ms ALM restoration before Error correction no error 6x10-5 3x10-5 6x10-6 3x10-6 6x10-7 3x10-7 6x10-8 Time to restore (average) 5 ms 4 ms 8 ms 40 ms 80 ms 400 ms 800 ms 4000 ms
Setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1x10-12 less 1x10-12 less
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
105
Switching Time
Without occasional traffic Less than 5 ms plus BER ALM detecting time and control signal propagation time. With occasional traffic Less than 9.5 ms plus BER ALM detecting time and control signal propagation time.
DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer)

Automatic DADE (+/- 3 bits) functions to automatically synchronize two baseband signals transmitted by a Main CH and Prot CH when to carry out protection switching. Manual DADE (0 to 31 bits) is provided to compensate the baseband signal path difference between each Main CH and Prot CH.
Wait to Restore (WTR, option setting)

Delay time from detecting BER ALM restoration to releasing protection switching is available to eliminate unnecessary RPS operation when the propagation condition is unstable. If other channel failed during the WTR period, the WTR will be cancelled immediately and Prot CH is taken over by the channel newly failed.
12.5
Occasional Traffic (option)
The lowest priority traffic can be transmitted by Prot CH when all channels are normal. If any channel failed, the occasional traffic will be disconnected immediately to relief the traffic of main channel failed. Extra OCC INTF for STM-1 electrical interface and OPT OCC unit for STM-1 optical interface are required for the occasional traffic transmission.
106
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
13
BASEBAND INTERFACE, SUPERVISORY/CONTROL & SWITCHING UNIT
TL terminal and repeater equipment are equipped with a baseband interface, supervisory/control & switching (SCSU) Unit for each switching group. The main function of SCSU is: Provides signal interfaces of STM-1, Orderwire, User Channel, Wayside and Digital Communication Channel. Provides interface of the Web based Local Craft Terminal (Web LT) and SNMP Manager for Network Management System (NMS). Provides STM-1 electrical/optical interface. Provides interface of the External Timing Clock Source. Performs the Radio Protection Switching (RPS) at bipolar stage. Retrieves/registers alarm/status data for protection control and indication. Retrieves/registers Performance Monitoring data. Supervisory/Control of the Radio Protection Switching System at bipolar and unipolar signal level. Provides Orderwire functions. Administrates the Timing Clock Synchronization. Relays Housekeeping (External) supervisory/control signal. Registers the NE setting (provisioning) data.
The SCSU block is composed of following units BSW SV TCUa HKb ECUc OCC INTFd OPT BSW1e OPT BSW2f OPT OCCg BSW INTFh a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Bipolar Switch unit for STM-1 electrical interface Supervisory unit Timing Control Unit Housekeeping unit Embedded Communication Unit Occasional Traffic Interface unit Baseband Switch Interface unit for STM-1 optical 1(S.1-1) Baseband Switch Interface unit for STM-1 optical 2 (L.1-1) Occasional Traffic Interface unit for STM-1 optical Baseband Switch Interface unit
Card protection (X and Y) is available as option Option, maximum 2 units can be installed Option for 3+1 double terminal operation Option, maximum 1 unit can be installed. (max. 2 for co-chan.) Option for STM-1 optical interface Option for STM-1 optical interface Option, maximum 1 unit can be installed. (max. 2 for co-chan.) Only used for 2x(7+1) co-channel operation
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
107
Fig.59 shows the functional block diagram of SCSU.
BSW units Main 1 LINE and RADIO STM-1 CMI ? WS X 2 UC X 1 M2 Mn Prot M1
MSTU units M2 Mn
M1
To/from Prot & M1 To/from all MSTUs EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK OUT TCU To/from all MSTUs
HK ALARM IN HK CONTROL OUT
HK* SV unit
SCSU
ECU *
Web LT LAN/X25 HK IN/OUT DCC IN/OUT Radio UC X 2 OW (2W VF) X OW OW (4W VF) X VF/DGTL To/from RPS 2 SV sub -unit for RPS 2
Fig.59 - Schematic block diagram of SCSU function
13.1
Signal Interface
Connectors of STM-1 Electrical/Optical Interface and Wayside traffic of 75- ohms unbalanced are located on the front panel of BSW/OPT BSW unit. Connectors for Wayside traffic of 120 ohms balanced and other auxiliary signals are located on the user interface area (UIA) block. Pin assignment of interface connector is shown in Section 3. INSTALLATION of this manual.
108
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
13.2
Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit
A Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit is provided for each main channel. The STM-1 electrical interface signal to/ from other equipment are interfaced to this BSW unit. The BSW unit switches following signals simultaneously: An STM-1 CMI signal Wayside Traffic (Both on SOH and RFCOH) and User Channel (SOH).
The Bipolar switch is activated for equipment failure and causes some data loss (hit switch).
13.3
Bipolar Switch for Optical Interface (OPT BSW) unit
A Bipolar Switch for optical Interface (OPT BSW) unit is provided for each main channel as an option. The STM-1 optical input signal to/from other equipment is interfaced to this OPT BSW unit. The OPT BSW unit switches following signals simultaneously: An STM-1 CMI signal after O-E conversion and before E-O conversion Wayside Traffics (SOH and RFCOH), a User Channel (SOH)
The Bipolar switch is activated for equipment failure and causes some data loss (hit switch).
13.4
Supervisory (SV) unit
The main function of SV unit is: Terminates Orderwire, User Channel and DCC signals. Provides interface of the Web based Local Craft Terminal (Web LT) and SNMP Network Management System and ethernet. Retrieves/registers alarm/status data for protection control and indication. Retrieves/registers Performance Monitoring data. Supervisory/Control of the RPS at bipolar and unipolar signal level. Provides Orderwire functions. Registers the NE setting (provisioning) data. Relays Housekeeping (8 item input and 4 item output) DCC connection to/from LINE and RADIO side
Fig.60 shows LEDs switches and connectors of SV unit.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
109
SV
UNIT LINE MIS ACS/SWDL NORM NE ALM/RCI MAINT CARD OUT ACO CALL E CALL E
LAN 1 LAN 2
2W E1 2W E2 LED TEST ACO BZ EN
Fig.60 - Front View of SV Unit
LED Indication
The SV unit displays summarize alarms/status of TL equipment (NE) are indicated as shown on Tab.33, Tab.34 and Tab.35. Detailed LED indications are available on each unit.
110
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.33 - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (1/3) LED indication Group Indication for SV unit LED UNIT/RCI Color Red Green (Y) Blinking Solid on Yellow (G) LINE Red Green (Y) MISC ACS/SWDL Red Green (Y) Red Indication for NE NORM NE ALM/RCI Green (Y) Red Blinking Solid on Solid on Solid on Blinking Solid on Solid on Solid on Status Solid on Description Unit failure of SV unit Log memory threshold crossed RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit Normal operation of SV unit Configuration mismatch of SV unit SINT/RSC/DCC signal failure SINT/RSC/DCC signal normal Housekeeping alarm (DI) on Provisioning/SWDL data is being writing Mismatch of software version Normal operation of NE CR/MJ/MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
Blinking MAINT CARD OUT Yellow (G) Red Yellow (G) ACO Orderwire CALL E1 CALL E2 Yellow (G) Green (Y) Green (Y) Solid on Solid on Solid on Solid on Blinking Blinking
RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in NE Maintenance condition of NE CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than WR CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious than WR Alarm cut off of NE E1 orderwire is being called E2 orderwire is being called
Note: Green (Y) = Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1 Yellow (G) = Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.
Tab.34 - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (2/3) Switch Control Switch ACO SW LED TEST RESET BZ EN Part No SW 5000 SW 5700 SW 1200 SW 5600 SW 5800 SW 5602 SW 5601 Type Push Push Push Dip Description Alarm cut off LED test Factory use Open: Buzzer OFF Close: Buzzer ON Factory use
Dip
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
111
Tab.35 - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (3/3) Connector Function Connector E1-2W E2-2W LAN1 LAN2 DEBAG SINT2CLK Part No J4500 J4600 CN 3700 CN 3700 CN 5800 CN 600 Type Modular Modular Modular Multi-pin Multi-pin Multi-pin Description E1 orderwire 2-wire telephone E2 orderwire 2-wire telephone LAN connector LAN connector Factory use Factory use
Orderwire Function
Completely independent two orderwires, E1 and E2 are provided. To use an orderwire, connect an ordinary 2-wire telephone set to E1-2W or E2-2W modular jack. Station calling is carried out by selective calling through the telephone key-pad. Individual station call: Station group call: Press #, Group No., Station No. Press #, Group No., * * (2 asterisks)
4-wire VF in/out ports are provided for the connection to/from other equipment.
Housekeeping (HK)
8 items of HK alarm input and 4 items of HK control output are available as standard supply. In addition of optional HK units, maximum alarm input is 72-item and maximum HK control output is 36-item.
Digital Communication Channel (DCC)

A DCC line can be transmitted by the Main 1 channel both LINE side and RADIO side. Fig.61 shows the schematic DCC termination by SV.
SV LAN LAN GP1-W1-RS-LINE GP1-W1-MS-LINE HUB GP1-W1-RS-RADIO GP1-W1-MS-RADIO Controller
GP2-W1-RS-LINE GP2-W1-MS-LINE
ECU GP2-W1-RS-RADIO HUB GP2-W1-MS-RADIO
LINE side RS GP1-W1 MS RS GP2-W1 MS ECU SV RS
RADIO side GP1-W1 MS RS GP2-W1 MS
Fig.61 - Schematic DCC termination by SV and ECU. 112
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
13.5
Timing Control Unit (TCU)
A Timing Control Unit (TCU) is provided for each TL equipment. The Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) provides an extra slot and automatic/manual switching facilities for TCU unit protection (X and Y) as option. The TCU accepts the synchronization timing clock signal from three (3) STM-1 lines and/or two (2) external clock inputs (2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mb/s), then regenerates the clock signal to supply to the NE and external clock output port. The TCU generates the clock signal internally (Holdover mode and Internal mode) in case of signal source input loss. For detailed application, see paragraph "14.2 Synchronization.
13.6
Embedded Communication (ECU)
The SV unit terminates a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) by using Main 1 channel for N+1 alternated and 2x(N+1) co-channel operation. For 3+1 double terminal, single-feed operation. Digital Communication Channel (DCC) are connected between A-B and B-C radio route through this ECU unit.
13.7
Housekeeping (HK) unit (option)
The SV unit can accommodate 8 items of Housekeeping (HK) input and 4 items of HK output. To increase Housekeeping (HK) in/out items, maximum two HK units can be installed as option. Number of item SV unit only SV unit + HK 1 SV unit + HK 1 + HK 2 K input (DI) 8 40 72 HHK output (DO) 4 20 36
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
113
FRX equipment Housekeeping input (DI) 6.4 L
Other equipment
Photo coupler
-48 V (-36 to -72 V) -24 V (-19 to -36 V)
0.3 mA to 11.3 mA
Housekeeping output (DO)
L Relay Max. I = 100 mA Max. V = DC 110 V L
Fig.62 - Housekeeping in/out (DI/DO) interface
13.8
Occasional Interface (OCC INTF/OPT OCC) unit (option)
An OCC INTF unit will be installed for optional occasional traffic transmission by the protection channel. The OCC INTF provides STM-1 CMI interface and to be installed underneath of the BSW unit of last main channel. The OPT OCC provides STM-1 optical interface and to be installed underneath of the OPT BSW unit of last main channel.
13.9
Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit (option)
A BSW INTF unit will be installed on SCSU block of initial shelf to control BSW units of RPS 2 group. (Only for 2x(7+1), co-channel operation) The BSW INTF relays control command and response signals between the SV unit on 1st SCSU and BSW units on 2nd SCSU.
114
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
14
APPLICATIONS
14.1
Co-Channel Operation
The Co-channel frequency operation system can transmit two STM-1 signals per RF simultaneously by using same RF frequency carrier both V- and H- polarization. This operation is able to double the spectrum efficiency. The transmission capacity of Wayside traffic, User channel and other auxiliary signals will be doubled as well. For Co-channel operation, the TL has following features: Powerful XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceller) XPIC is configured as standard and enabled by software setting Receiver RF local oscillator syncronization between H- and V-polarization for each RF channel.
Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC)

The XPIC is provided to improve the interference distortion caused by antenna Cross Polarization Interference (XPD) between V-polarization and H-polarization. For Co-channel operation, high Cross Polarization Discrimination (XPD) antenna is used. However, cross polarization interference cannot be compensated only by high XPD antenna because XPD degradation due to propagation path at the presence of multi-path fading is also considered. Therefore in addition to high XPD antenna Cross Polarization Interference Canceller is essentially required. The XPIC is an adaptive interference cancellation circuit using 11-tap transversal equalizer. Two (2) receivers of same radio frequency receive the mixture of desired and undesired (interference) signal components and extract their interfered signals each other and subtracts from the received signal after automatic adaptive amplitude/phase adjustment. Fig.63 shows the functional diagram of XPIC and Fig.64 shows the cross cable connection of MSTUs.
Receive Local Carrier Oscillator

Two (2) receivers of same frequency shall be supplied with local carrier signals synchronized each other. A cable connection to/from REF I/O of two MSTUs is required and the baseband clock signals are synchronized each other by software setting.
Route ID
Different route Identification (Route ID) for radio section shall be set for securing the signal identification between V-polarization and H-polarization.
Master/Slave setting
Master/Slave setting of MSTU is carried out through the Web LT.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
115
Desired signal Transmitter X LOC REF I/O Receiver X XPIC OUT 70 MHz XPIC Interference IF LOC LOC
RF LOC
XPIC IN XPIC
XPIC OUT REF I/O Desired signal Transmitter Y LOC Receiver Y LOC 70 MHz IF LOC
Fig.63 - Functional diagram of XPIC
REF I/O (RF LOC)
XPIC IN (70 MHz) XPIC OUT (70 MHz)
Fig.64 - Cross cable connection of MSTUs for co-channel operation
116
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
14.2
Synchronization
The TL system shall be operated synchronized with the reference clock source of the network. The clock signal of TL equipment is supplied through the TCU (Timing Clock Unit) of SCSU (Baseband interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) block.
14.2.1
Synchronization Source
The TL can accept one of three kinds of signal as the synchronization clock source.
Incoming STM-1 Signal (LINE) to TCU, maximum 3 inputs

From STM-1 line input (Line side) From MSTU receiver output (Radio side)
External Clock Input (EXT) to TCU, maximum 2 inputs

2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mb/s
Input connectors are located in the Connection Area of SCSU.
TCU Oscillator
Holdover mode: in case of the synchronization reference source loss, the TCU generates the clock signal according to the data just before the interruption. After Holdover mode: free-running self oscillation. Internal Oscillator: if TCU fails, MSTU generates the internal free-running clock signal.
14.2.2
Synchronization Mode
The TL has two Synchronization Mode options.
Mode 1
The TL does not output to the Synchronous Source Unit (SSU) directly. The TL receives the reference clock source from other equipment through the STM-1 signal input (LINE) or EXT CLK input connectors (EXT). Most of the case, the TL is operated in this mode.
Mode 2
The TL outputs to the Synchronous Source Unit (SSU) directly. For Equipment Clock (EC) source, the external clock from the SSU is possibly selected as the first choice. Note: For mode-2 application, redesign in accordance with ITU-T Recommendation G.781 is under development as of November, 2005. For detailed delivery date, please contact to SIAE marketing staff.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
117
SSU: Synchronous Source Unit

High quality reference clock source equipment to generate/regenerate the primary/secondary clock signal of the network in accordance with ITU-U Rec. G.813.
Ext 2M CLK (X) (Y) Line CLK PRI 1 PRI 2 PRI 3 INT CLK
EC Selection (Max.3) to be selected according to Quality (SSMB) & Priority T0 PLL
EQPT CLK Ou tput to other Equipment 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
TCU
EQPT Clock supply to FRX Equipment

Fig.65 - Diagram of synchronization Mode 1
Line CLK PRI 1 PRI 2 PRI 3
LC Selection (Max.3) to be selected acc ording to Quality (SSMB) & T4 Priority
EQPT CLK Output to other Equipment 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
SSU
INT CLK Ex t 2M CLK (X)
EC Selection (Max. 2) to be selected according to Quality (SSMB) & T0 Priority PLL
EQPT CLK Output to other Equipment
2 Mb/s or 2 MHz TCU S1 byte: 111111 DNU
EQPT Clock supply to FRX Equipment
Fig.66 - Diagram of synchronization Mode 2 (under development as of December 2005)
14.2.3
Clock Mode
Two clock modes are available for TCU setting, the TCU mode and the THROUGH mode.
TCU mode
On the down stream (from the primary station to the end station), the equipment clock synchronizes with the incoming signal from primary station. On the up stream (from the end station to the primary station), the clock synchronizes with the incoming signal from the primary station as it is on the down stream.
118
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
THROUGH mode
On the down stream, the equipment clock synchronizes with the incoming signal from primary station. On the up stream, the clock synchronizes with the incoming signal from the end station.
TCU mode FRX TCU
THROUGH mode FRX TCU
Down stream Primary station Up stream

Fig.67 - Clock mode of TCU
End station
14.2.4
Quality Level (S1 byte)
The quality level of synchronization source is informed by the S1 byte of RSOH. The TCU selects the source of best quality as the reference. Tab.36 - S1 byte code and Quality level Quality Level 2 3 4 5 6 6 S1 byte Bit 5 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit 6 0 1 0 0 0 1 Bit 7 1 0 0 1 0 1 Bit 8 0 0 0 1 0 1 Quality description Traceable to ITU-T G. 811 (Best quality) Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 transit Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 local TCU internal clock Quality unknown Do not use for synchronization
14.2.5
Line Clock Priority
Most of the cases, the TL receives the reference clock from the incoming STM-1 signal. The TL facing the end station accepts the source from the Line side (Access ID = GP1-Wn-L, n= Main channel number), input to BSW unit. The TL facing the master station accepts the source from the Radio side (Access ID = GP1Wn-R), the output of MSTU receiver. Fig.68 shows an example of line clock selection of SDH radio system.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
119
Master station
MUX
FRX
FRX
MUX
FRX
FRX
MUX
End station
Line side GP1 -Wn -L
Radio side GP1 -Wn -R
Line side GP1 -Wn -L
Radio side GP1 -Wn -R
Note: n = Main channel number Normally, Main 1 (n = 1) shall be selected as Priority 1 (PRI 1)
Fig.68 - Example of line clock selection
14.3
Orderwire Applications
14.3.1
Orderwire Extension
The TL provides two modular jacks for orderwire telephone connection, E1 and E2. In additions, 4-wire VF terminals of E1 and E2 are provided for connection to external equipment. Signal Impedance Input Level Output Level Maximum Output Level 4-wire Voice Frequency 600 ohms balanced Standard -4.0 dBr -16.0 to -0.5 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step Standard -4.0 dBr -8.5 to +7.0 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step +3.14 dBmO for A-law
14.3.2
Digital Through
At repeater stations and back-to-back terminal stations, orderwires can be forwarded as the digital signal level when telephone sets are on-hook or not connected. When one of telephone sets (E1 or E2) is offhooked, both of E1 and E2 line are terminated and converted to the voice frequency level. Digital through function is provided to minimize the degradation of orderwires due to analog/digital conversion and noise/distortion intrusion at the analog signal level.
120
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
14.3.3
Ring Protection
In case of ring network configuration, the orderwire lines compose a loop circuit. This loop circuit may cause the self oscillation (hauling) of orderwire signal. To prevent this hauling, a port of orderwire circuit shall be disconnected at the master station. If any section of the loop was interrupted by line failure, the orderwire ring protection reconnects the loop automatically to recover the orderwire communication. Fig.69 shows the function of Orderwire Ring Protection.
Master station
Master station
These ports are disconnected to stop hauling.
VF circuit
VF circuit
Without Ring Protection
With Ring Protection
Line failure
VF circuit
Master station
In Case of Line Failure With Ring Protection

These ports are rec onnected to recover the orderwire circuit.
Fig.69 - Ring protection
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
121
122
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Section 3. INSTALLATION
15
PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION
This chapter describes the procedure for preparing the TL rack installation. It covers: Storage Preparation for unpacking Unpacking procedure
15.1
Storage, Unpacking and Inspection
This procedure describes the unpacking and inspection of the TL equipment. It assumes that all equipment has been received and all data forms and job engineering drawings have been completed.
15.1.1
Storage
When the equipment is to be kept in storage, leave the equipment in the shipping containers. Store slidein units in the special bags and the units were originally shipped in. The bags are coated with a conductive material and will protect the slide-in units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Fig.70 shows examples of ESD warning labels.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
123
Fig.70 - Electrostatic Discharge Warning Labels After unloading the containers, check the contents against the invoice sheet. Check containers for external damage, quantity and contents. If any defects or errors are found, immediately contact the person in charge for proper remedy. Do not leave the containers outdoors. Store the containers in a place provided with adequate roof cover which will protect the containers from rain and dust. Keep the containers in a dry place.
15.1.2
Preparation
The unpacking site shall be protected from rain, water, dust etc. Prepare sufficient space for the unpacking site. Prepare the tools for the unpacking of the containers. The quantity of equipment and installation materials should be checked as it is unpacked.
15.1.3
Unpacking and Inspection
Before unpacking the equipment, inspect the containers for any signs of damage that may have occurred during shipment. File any claims for shipping damage with the transportation company according to their published procedure. When unpacking the equipment, use the packing list that accompanies each shipment to determine that all items are present before continuing with the installation. Notify the nearest SIAE representative if there is a shortage of any kind.
15.1.4
1 2 3 4
General Unpacking Method
Cut the straps that hold the cover on the container. Open the cover and pull out the sealed polythene bag. Cut immediately under the seal with scissors or a knife. Remove the equipment from the pack by gripping the protectors attached to the equipment.
124
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
5 6 7
Immediately check the contents according to the invoice sheets. Check if the component and parts have been damaged. Notify the nearest SIAE representative if there is damage of any kind.
15.2
Storage of Spare Units
Spare units are separately packed from other main frame units. These units should be kept in clean places that avoid high temperature and high humidity. These units are stored in the special bags which are coated with a conductive material and will protect spare units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD). See Fig.70, for indication markings.
15.3
Accessories
There are two kinds of accessories. Installation accessories during installation period such as connector plugs or connector assembly. Maintenance accessories according to the routine maintenance plan and maintenance accessories should be stored in the maintenance area.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
125
16
OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES AND JUMPERS
16.1
Warning and General Handling
This procedure lists precautionary measures which must be followed when dealing with fibre optical components.
16.1.1
Tools Required
No tools are required for this procedure.
16.1.2
Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using or maintaining communication equipment. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment. WARNING Never look into the end of an optical cable or fibre pigtail. PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser radiation is present. Never handle exposed fibre with bare hands or permit contact with the body. Fibre fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and remove. Fig.71 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting and receiving units:
Fig.71 - Laser Warning Labels
16.1.3
1
Storage
Protective caps are provided with the optical connectors of the optical cable (see Fig.72).
126
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Do not expose the optical cables to direct sunlight. The recommended storage temperature is -10 to 60C (14 to 140F), and the maximum recommended relative humidity is 90%.
Protective cap
Fig.72 - Protective Cap (SC/PC Connector)
16.1.4
1
Handling
Do not pull the optical cable when the connector is attached to the optical unit (see Fig.73).
Fig.73 - Optical Cable Pulling
Take care not to bend or obstruct the optical cable (see Fig.74).
Fig.74 - Optical Cable Bending and Obstruction Limits
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
127
Do not bend the optical cable at a radius of less than 50 mm (see Fig.75).
Fig.75 - Optical Cable Minimum Bending Radius
Do not twist the optical cable more than 360 per meter of length (see Fig.76).
Fig.76 - Optical Cable Twist Limits
Do not drop or step on the optical cable and do not subject it to excessive vibration (Fig.77).
Fig.77 - Optical Cable Vibration and Shock Damage
128
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
16.2
Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables
This procedure details the precautions which must be taken to preserve the integrity of optical connectors and cables during connection and disconnection.
16.2.1
Tools Required
No tools are required for this procedure.
16.2.2
1 2
Preparation
Verify that there are no serious defects in the optical cables and connectors. Clean the optical fibre end surface with a cotton swab soaked in alcohol.
16.2.3
1
Connection Procedure
While holding the connector body, insert the connector. Ensure the connector key engages.
16.2.4
1 2
Disconnection Procedure
Gently pull the connector body away from the optical coupling interface. Be careful not to pull or bend the optical cable. Place a protective cap over the optical cable connector.
16.3
Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors
This section provides procedures for the cleaning of optical fibre cables and connectors.
16.3.1
Tools Required
The tools required are: Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit (CLETOP Reel Type A)
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available: Pure alcohol Mediswabs Lens Cleaning Paper.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
129
16.3.2
Procedure
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is available: 1 2 3 4 5 Insert the connector into the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit. Twist the connector back and forth. Slide the connector down the slot in the cleaning kit. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 in the other slot of the cleaning kit. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in chapter 16.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors.
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available: 1 2 3 4 Use a Mediswab dampened with alcohol to clean the end of the fibre connector. Allow the connector to air dry. Wipe the end of the connector with lens cleaning paper. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in chapter 16.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors, Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors.
16.4
Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors
16.4.1
Connector End-face Definitions
The condition of the connector end-face is a significant factor in the long-term operation of the network. This procedure defines the requirements for the inspection of terminated optical fibres.
16.4.2
End-face Zone Definitions
The connector end-face is divided into the following regions: core cladding
For the purpose of inspection the cladding region is divided into internal and external areas. See Fig.78.
130
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Internal Cladding area = 62.5 m External Cladding area = 125 m Adhesive Bond
Fig.78 - Connector End-face
16.4.3
Defect Definitions
The following definitions apply: a scratch defect is a linear extended surface mark a pit defect is a localised surface mark a crack defect is a stress fracture either wholly within the fibre or intersecting the fibre surface a chip defect has material broken away from the fibre following the generation of crack defects.
Scratch and Pit Defects

The core region must be free of blemishes.
Chip Defects
The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Fig.79 for acceptance criteria.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
131
Acceptable: chip in outer cladding area only
Internal cladding area Unacceptable: chip extends into inner cladding area
External cladding area Acceptable: chip in outer cladding area only

Fig.79 - Chip Defects
Crack Defects
The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Fig.80 for acceptance criteria.
Unacceptable: crack extends for more than 25% of cladding circumference
Internal cladding area Unacceptable: crack extends into inner cladding area
External cladding area Acceptable: crack in outer cladding area only

Fig.80 - Crack Defects
16.4.4
Tools Required
Fiberscope
16.4.5
Procedure
To view the optical fibber connector: 1 2 132 Insert the connector into the Fiberscope, using the adapter if required. Depress the trigger to turn the Fiberscope on.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
3 4 5 6
Adjust the Fiberscope, if necessary, to position the image in the centre of the viewing area, and focus. Clean the connector face in accordance with chapter 16.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors, if required. If the fibre does not meet the acceptance criteria due to damage, the cable must be replaced. If the fibre does not meet the acceptance criteria after cleaning, and further cleaning is not effective, the cable must be replaced.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
133
17
RACK INSTALLATION
This chapter describes the precautions and the procedure required for the installation of the TL rack.
17.1
Precautions
As a general precaution, installing sites should be selected as follows.
17.1.1

Suitable Places for Equipment Installation
Do not install in places subject to vibration. Do not install in dusty places. Avoid places which becomes high in temperature. (recommended temperature range 20C to 40C) Install on a flat and level floor. Do not eat or drink in the vicinity of the equipment Keep away from strong electromagnetic fields. When cleaning equipment, use a soft bristled brush and a vacuum cleaner with plastic nozzle or low pressure dry air.
17.2
Safety Measures for Equipment Handling
Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units are stamped with anti-electrostatic marks and require special care in handling and storage. When handling slide-in units for installation, removal or option setting, always wear a wrist strap which is connected to safety ground. Hold only the edge of slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on the units. Transport and store slide-in units in the special bags in which the units were originally shipped. Always fold the open end of the bag over and close it securely with tape. When returning units to SIAE use these special bags. Use the original shipping containers whenever possible. During installation or replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into slots. Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimize power surges during installation. Slow insertion will ensure that the slide-in units are not damaged.
134
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
17.3
Tools Required
Standard hand tools and socket wrench set are required. Wrist strap - to be worn at all times when handling circuit cards.
17.4

Preparation
Use working gloves while installing and securing the equipment According to the national plans and procedures, the main structure must already be installed before installation of the equipment begins. Check and ensure that all civil works necessary for the installation of the equipment have been completed. Ensure that these checks are made before the start of the installation work. If anything is wrong or incomplete, take corrective steps before starting the installation work.
17.4.1

Bay Erection
When erecting the equipment rack, pay attention to the vicinity of other equipment and keep the enough space to erect the equipment rack. Before erecting the rack, heavy units such as MSTU must be taken off. (Originally these are separately packed from the equipment rack for safety transportation.) Ensure each unit inserts and secures properly, otherwise units will drop out from the shelf while erecting. To avoid unexpected material dropping off, remove in advance the material which attaches easily to the equipment rack.
17.4.2

Bay Securing
Stand the rack in the vertical position at the bay layout designated. First securing the top of the rack, then the base. Use the ratchet wrench and suitable length extension bar to tighten the bolts for fixing.
17.5
Rack Configuration
Fig.81 shows overview of TL radio equipment rack.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
135
Duplexer port 110 mm separation each
Anchor holes
Fig.81 - Dimension of ETSI Standard Rack Installation
136
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
17.6
Shelf Configuration
Fig.82 shows initial shelf configuration. MSTU units are slid into the MSTU block via plug-in adapter and other units are plug-in'ed directly to the shelf. For MSTU, DC power supply and RF signals connection between unit and shelf are plugged in via plug-in adapter. User interface signal connection such as baseband signals, supervision and control signals also plugged in via multi-pin connector mounted on the BWB of the SCSU and UIA blocks.
Fig.82 - Initial Shelf and MSTU Unit
17.7
How to Install Shelves & Units
17.7.1
Preparation of Shelves
Shelf bonnet cover

Remove shelf bonnet cover to be installed (Fig.83).
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
137
Fig.83 - Remove the bonnet cover Remove the MSTU Adapter from each MSTU (Fig.84). Remove two fittings from the MSTU Adapter each (Fig.85) These fittings are for transportation and unit testing only. Install MSTU Adapters and Slide in Rails on to the shelf. (Fig.86)
Fig.84 - Remove MSTU adapter
Fig.85 - Remove 2 fittings
138
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Fig.86 - Install MSTU adapter and slide in rails
17.7.2
Mounting of Shelves
Shelves should be mounted on to the rack in order. Install initial shelf first, then expansion shelf.
Initial shelf
Expansion shelf
Fig.87 - Mounting of shelves - 1st
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
139
Joint initial and expansion shelf by screws attached.
Fig.88 - Mounting of shelves - 2nd
17.7.3
Mounting of Slide In Units
Slide in units are locked to the shelf by latches. To remove a slide-in-unit (SIU), lift latching levers and pull out the slide in unit. To mount a SIU, lift latching levers first, then slide in the unit firmly and close latching levers confirming that levers are engaging with the shelf securely.
Fig.89 - Mounting of slide in units Full size SIUs have 2 latches at the top and bottom each. To mount an SIU, confirm that 2 levers are engaging to the shelf evenly when you close latching levers.
140
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Installing an MSTU
AN MSTU is equipped with 2 mounting screws. When you install an MSTU, remove the front cover first. Then turn 2 screws evenly by pressing the middle of MSTU gently. DO NOT SLAM THE UNIT.
Fig.90 - Installing an MSTU Half size SIUs have only one latch at the bottom each. To remove/mount an SIU, remove a guard rail from the shelf first as shown left above.
17.8
Expansion of BRU Module
Fig.91 shows the installation of RF Branching Network unit.
Fig.91 - RF branching network unit RF branching network module can be installed on two (2) channel filters basis.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
141
18
USER INTERFACE CONNECTION
This chapter provides information on the inter-shelf connections and user interface connections to the external communication equipment.
18.1
TL Signal Input
The TL radio can operate one of the following three (3) Baseband interface conditions. STM-1 electrical interface is standard and also STM-1 optical interface is available as an option. In addition, the unit mixture of STM-1 electrical and optical interface is available. Interface unit is as follows; BSW unit per working channel for STM-1 electrical interface OPT BSW1 unit per working channel for STM-1 optical interface (S-1.1) OPT BSW2 unit per working channel for STM-1 optical interface (L-1.1) OCC INTF unit for STM-1 electrical interface when low priority traffic is used by using the protection channel. OPT OCC unit for STM-1 optical interface when low priority traffic is used by using the protection channel.
18.1.1
Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing or maintaining the waveguide. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment. Fig.92 shows the warning labels that are attached to all emitting and receiving units:
Fig.92 - Warning Labels
142
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
18.2
Waveguide Connection
Fig.93 and Fig.94 show the location of antenna port of TL radio equipment. Fig.95 shows the waveguide connections to the equipment antenna port.
V(H) MAIN SD
N+1, Single-feed Operation
V(H) MAIN SD MAIN
H(V) SD
N+1, Alternated/3+1 Double Terminal Operation
V(H) MAIN SD MAIN
H(V) SD
2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation
Fig.93 - Antenna port location on top of Initial Shelf (Waveguide spacing = 110 mm each)
TOP of Fujitsu standard rack
72.3
TOP of Waveguides
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
2200.0 BRU
Fig.94 - Antenna port location on top of the initial shelf 143
H -Bend
Pressure Connector
Flange Adapter Flexible Waveguide Main Transmitter, Receiver Antenna Port
Pressure Inlet SD Receiver Antenna Port
Fig.95 - An example of Feeder Connection for Alternated Operation
18.2.1

Tools Required
Standard hand tools Step ladder for connecting wave guide Ratchet type set of socket wrenches Waveguide Allen keys Torque wrench for waveguide Allen keys.
144
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
18.2.2
Preparation
Do not connect feeder with the equipment until all the twists in the feeder have been corrected. See Fig.96. A person experienced in waveguide connections should carry out the installation of the feeder to the equipment. Refer to the wave guide installation manual.
Fig.96 - Twisting Wave guides
18.2.3
Precautions
When the wave guides are connected to the radio equipment, pay attention not to apply a forced twisting torque to the radio equipment side. Refer the wave guide installation manual.
18.3
Connection of Primary DC Power Lead
This section provides the procedure for installing DC power and ground cables in the equipment shelf and it shows the office power input terminal identification. As shown in Fig.97, DC power connection from primary power system is connected with DC power supply terminal on user interface area (UIA) block directly. Also dual-feed DC power supply system both system-X and system-Y is available.
18.3.1

Tools Required
Standard hand tools DMM (Digital Multi-Meter)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
145
-48V DC Power for UIA block from Office Power Supply
W /C BPF BPF BPF
W /C BPF BPF BPF
WC BPF BPF BPF
W /C BPF BPF BPF
DUP SD RX TX BRU
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
MSTU
BSW INTF
BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X SV
SCSU NFB1 NFB2 NFB3
UIA
Connectors
TERM
Dual -feed available both system -X and system -Y
Expansion Shelf
Dual -feed available UIA Connectors TERM both syste m -X and system -Y
Fig.97 - DC power connection to the UIA block
18.3.2
Procedure
Prepare power lead and crimping terminal by the national plan. Main DC power distribution board side. Removing of cable sheath (see Figure 4.6 for details)
146
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Crimp terminal by using die. Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the equipment cable inlet through the cable rack.
Equipment side Removing of cable sheath (see Figure 4.6 for details) Crimp terminal by using die.
Fig.98 shows the cable sheath and terminal connection.
Fig.98 - Cable Sheath 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Disconnect office power or remove fuses from bay fuse panel and use a voltmeter to ensure that the supply rail is at zero volts (with reference to the earth ground). Connect the red (0 V) lead to the battery return terminal of the power distribution board. Connect the blue (-48 V) lead to the -48V terminal. Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the equipment cable inlet through the cable rack. Structure AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory. Connect the AMP connector to the DC power connector of the unit/shelf. Reconnect office power or re-install fuses.
18.3.3
Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment
The crimping method (Soldering less) shall be applied only to the terminal connecting of power wiring and branching connection indoor. Annealed copper is only used for this method. See Figure 4.8 for method of crimping. Method of Crimping 1 2 Choose the die fit for the cross sectional area of terminal to use. While supporting the terminal by hand, insert it to the die section of the instrument and compress the terminal to the extent it does not slip off. Then set the soldering portion of the terminal body opposite the male die while inserting the terminal with its body coming to the centre of the die. Do not compress the terminal to the extent it would be deformed. Taking care not to have the relative position of terminal and die vary, start crimping the terminal. Insulating treatment at the compressed portion. This treatment shall be performed as follows: The insulating shall cover more than 1 mm in width on the insulated sheath. Wind PVC tape with a pitch of half width of tape as required.
3 4
Fig.99 shows the method for crimping the terminal and cable conductor.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
147
Fig.99 - Method of Crimping
18.3.4
1
Precautions
This equipment has the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Frame Ground (FG) terminal. Therefore, if your station has an ESD Ground terminal, connect to them. If difficult, connect to the FG of each equipment to keep the same voltage level as FG. While connecting the power lead, do not drop in any cable sheath or cable fragments. It may cause short circuits or faulty units. Ensure the cable is connected before turning on the main breaker.
2 3
18.3.5
AMP hand Crimping Tool
This section provides application procedures for AMP hand crimping tools. Fig.100 shows over view of AMP hand crimping Tool 23470-1, which crimps the AMP Dynamic D-5 loosepiece tab and receptacle contacts listed in Fig.101. The front of tool, into which wire is inserted, has AMP marking. Wire Size Marking and the Contact Series marking on it. The contact is inserted into the Back of the tool. The tool features two fixed dies (crimper), two movable dies (anvils), a locator/insulation stop, and a CERTI-CRIMP ratchet. The locator/insulation stop has two functions: first, it positions the contact between the crimper and anvil before crimping; and second, it limits insertion distance of the stripped wire into the contact. In use, it rests in the locator slot of the contact. The CERTICRIMP ratchet assures full crimping of the contact. Once engaged the ratchet will not release until the handles have been fully closed.
148
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Contact series name
FRONT OF TOOL CRIMPE
Wire Size ANVIL
Tool No.
CIRTI -CRIMP RATCHET
Fig.100 - AMP hand Crimping Tool
WIRE STRIP LENGTH
4.5~5.0
CONTACT Series: D CONTACT NO.: WIRE SIZE AWG: 16 -14 2 Sq.(mm ): 1.23-2.27
-5(S) 316041 -3
Front of Tool(Wire Size)
Locator/Insulation stop Contact Series Name
Contact Wire Slot in Locator Contact series Name Wire Size Wire Barrel
Stripped Wire
Locator slot(in contact)
Insulation Barrel Tool
Fig.101 - AMP hand Crimping Method
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
149
18.3.6
1 2 3
Crimping Procedures
Hold the tool so FRONT is facing you. Make sure ratchet is released by squeezing the tool handles and allowing them to open Fully. Holding contact by its mating portion and looking straight into front of the crimp section, insert contact from the back into die set. Position contact between crimpers so locator enters locator slot in contact. Holding contact in this position, squeeze tool handles together until insulation barrel anvil starts entry into insulation crimper. DO NOT deform insulation barrel or wire barrel. Insert a properly stripped wire through the wire slot in locator and into wire barrel of contact until insulation butts against the locator/insulation stop. Holding wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Use both hands after the wire is fixed. Allow tool handles to open fully. Remove ped contact from tool.
4 5 6 7
CAUTION: Care shall be taken to ensure that the contact is set at the good position (shown in Fig.102) for getting the contact crimped satisfactory.
CRIMPER LOCATOR
ANVIL
(a) Good Position
(b) Bad Position
Fig.102 - Good position for satisfactory crimping
18.3.7
Office Power Supply Check
This procedure verifies the office power for the TL radio equipment.
18.3.7.1

Tools Required
Standard hand tools Digital Multi Meter (DMM)
18.3.7.2
1 2 3
Procedure
Remove the DC power connector from the DC power terminal on SCSU block. Set the DMM scale to the 200 VDC range. Connect the positive/negative leads of the DMM to the DC power terminal.
150
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
4 5
Verify that the voltage is between -36V DC and -72V DC for -48V DC system. If it is not, contact the installation group. Disconnect the DMM leads and connect the DC power connectors to the DC power terminal on user interface area (UIA).
18.4
Frame Grounding
Fig.103 shows the Frame Ground connection of the TL radio equipment rack. The Frame Ground of the equipment rack should be connected to the station ground bus at the right bottom corner of SCSU shelf. In addition to the connection, Frame Ground connection between shelf also should be done.
W /C BPF BPF BPF
W /C BPF BPF BPF
WC BPF BPF BPF
W /C BPF BPF BPF
DUP SD RX TX BRU
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
MSTU
BSW INTF
BSW(M3) BSW(M2) SW(M1) HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X SV
SCSU NFB1 NFB2 NFB3
UIA Frame Ground Connection
Connectors
TERM
Frame Ground Connection
Expansion Shelf
Frame Ground Connection to UIA Connectors TERM Station Bus
Fig.103 - Frame Ground of the Equipment Rack
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
151
18.5
Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms
The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the TL installation. Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn Up procedures.
18.6
Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors
The SMA semi rigid coaxial connectors are pre-formed to exact lengths for connection from the branch filter to the MSTU plug-in Adapter. The transmitter output and receiver input are connected to the branching network through the MSTU plug-in Adapter shown in Fig.104. Careful handling should be used when fitting or removing the semi rigid coaxial connectors, using the torque wrench with a setting of 21/Ncm. Each end should be unscrewed before trying to remove the connector.
MSTU plug-in Adapter
Upper view of AD T P SMA Coaxial Connector
TX
RX
SD
TX port: Transmitter output RX: port: Main RX input SD port: SD RX in
MSTU
Fig.104 - MSTU plug-in Adapter and semi rigid coaxial cable connector
152
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
18.7
RF Branching Network Filter Connection
Fig.105 - RF Branching Network Filter connection to the shelf (Example for 3+1, Alternated Operation)
18.8
Baseband Signal Cable Connection
18.8.1
STM-1 electrical signal Interface
Fig.106 shows the STM-1 electrical interface baseband signal connection that is done at the front panel of the BSW(Baseband Switch) unit. Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 27CP and line impedance are 75 ohms and unbalanced.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
153
STM -1(156M) CMI IN
STM -1(156M) CMI
IN WS -S OUT Wayside IN WS -R OUT Signal IN/OUT BSW INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X
Front View of BSW unit
Fig.106 - STM-1 Electrical Interface Connection
18.8.2
STM-1 optical signal Interface
Fig.107 shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between TL radio equipment and Optical Fibre Transmission equipment that is done on the PCB of the OPT INTF (Optical signal Interface) unit. Optical Fibre connector type are FC type and they are accessible from front of the equipment rack.
154
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
To/from opticak fiber transmission equipment STM -1
STM -1 Output STM -1 Input
Optical cable Connector OPT BSW(M OPT BSW(M OPT BSW(M HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X OPT OCC OPT BSW(M OPT BSW(M OPT BSW(M BSW INTF Side View of OPT INTF unit
Fig.107 - STM-1 optical signal Interface
18.9
Wayside Signal Cable Connection
Fig.108 shows the 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection that is done at the front panel of the BSW (Baseband Switch) unit. Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 27CP and line impedance are 75 ohms and unbalanced.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
155
Front View of BSW unit
IN WS -S OUT
2.048 Mbit/s HDB3
IN
2.048 Mbit/s HDB3 OUT
OCC INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X OCC INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1)
IN WS -R OUT
Wa yside Signal IN/OUT (HDB3, 75 ohms, unbalance)
Wayside Signal IN/OUT(HDB3, 12 ohms, balance) See Chapter 5, section 5.11, PIN assignment
Fig.108 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection
156
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
19
CONNECTOR AND PIN ASSIGNMENT
This chapter provides information on the connector and connector pin assignments.
19.1
Connectors Layout on SCSU and UIA Block
Fig.109 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of SCSU and UIA blocks of initial shelf and Fig.110 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of SCSU and UIA blocks of expansion shelf.
CN-43 CN-41 CN-45
CN-42
SINTCLK
CN-40
SCSU Block
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
CN-31 CN-32 CN-33 CN-24 CN-23 CN-22 CN-21 CN-34 CN-17 CN-16 CN-15 CN-14 CN-13 CN-12 CN-11 CN-1 CN-2 CN-3 CN-4 CN-5 CN-6
UIA Block
Fig.109 - Multi-pin connectors layout of Initial Shelf
157
CN-43 CN-41
CN-42 CN-40
SCSU Block
CN-31 CN-32 CN-33 CN-24 CN-23 CN-22 CN-21 CN-34 CN-17 CN-16 CN-15 CN-14 CN-13 CN-12 CN-11
UIA Block
Fig.110 - Multi-pin connectors layout of Expansion Shelf
19.1.1
Connectors on the BWB of SCSU
On Tab.37, all connectors on the BWB of SCSU and UIA are listed up. Tab.37 - Connectors on the BWB of SCSU CM No. CN 1 CN 2 CN 3 CN 4 CN 5 CN 6 CN 11 CN 12 CN 13 CN 14 CN 15 CN 16 CN 17 CN 21 CN 22 CN 23 Description EXT SX EXT SY T4 SX T4 SY T0SX T0 SY WS/UC 1 WS/UC 2 WS/UC 3 WS/UC 4 WS/UC 5 WS/UC 6 WS/UC 7 HK 2 HK 3 HK 4 Remarks Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Housekeeping (DI/DO) Housekeeping (DI/DO) Housekeeping (DI/DO) Connector type 1.0/2.3 coaxial 1.0/2.3 coaxial 1.0/2.3 coaxial 1.0/2.3 coaxial 1.0/2.3 coaxial 1.0/2.3 coaxial Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin
158
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
CN 24 CN 31 CN 32 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35 CN 40 CN 41 CN 42 CN 43 CN 44 CN 45
HK 5 RAB EOW RUC HK 1 OSSI S-INTF 1 S-INTF 2 SSMB 1 SSMB 2 CM-BUS EOW
Housekeeping (DI/DO) Rack Alarm BUS Engineering Order Wire Radio User Channel Housekeeping (DI/DO) Operation Support System Serial Interface 1 Serial Interface 2 Synchronous State Message Byte BUS Synchronous State Message Byte BUS Channel Management BUS Engineering Order Wire
Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 15 multi-pin Dsub 15 multi-pin Dsub 25 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin DHA80 multi-pin DHA80 multi-pin DHA40 multi-pin DHA40 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin
19.2
Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1
Tab.38 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK1. Tab.38 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1 - 1st part Use Access Name HK1 Connector No. on BWB SCSU-CN34 Type of Connector Dsub 37
Tab.39 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1 - 2nd part Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 19 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 DO-4N DO-3N DO-2N DO-1N HK-Common Housekeeping OUT-4N Housekeeping OUT-3N Housekeeping OUT-2N Housekeeping OUT-1N HK Common Ground 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 DO-4C DO-3C DO-2C DO-1C HK-Common SDA SG SD AGC AGC SG Housekeeping OUT-4C Housekeeping OUT-3C Housekeeping OUT-2C Housekeeping OUT-1C HK Common Ground Signal Ground for Monitor SD AGC monitor (W1) Signal Ground for Monitor Description Remarks
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
159
25 24 23 22 21 20 DI-8 DI-6 DI-4 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-8 Housekeeping IN-6 Housekeeping IN-4 Housekeeping IN-2
6 5 4 3 2 1
AGC MON DI-7 DI-5 DI-3 DI-1 FG
AGC monitor (W1) Housekeeping IN-7 Housekeeping IN-5 Housekeeping IN-3 Housekeeping IN-1 Frame Ground
19 37
20
Fig.111 - HK1 connector
19.3
Tab.41 - Connector PIN assignment for HK2 - 2nd part Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 19 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 HK1 DO-8N HK1 DO-7N HK1 DO-6N HK1 DO-5N HK1 DO-4N HK1 DO-3N HK1 DO-2N HK1 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-8N Housekeeping OUT-7N Housekeeping OUT-6N Housekeeping OUT-5N Housekeeping OUT-4N Housekeeping OUT-3N Housekeeping OUT-2N Housekeeping OUT-1N 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HK1 DO-8C HK1 DO-7C HK1 DO-6C HK1 DO-5C HK1 DO-4C HK1 DO-3C HK1 DO-2C HK1 DO-1C HK-Common Housekeeping OUT-8C Housekeeping OUT-7C Housekeeping OUT-6C Housekeeping OUT-5C Housekeeping OUT-4C Housekeeping OUT-3C Housekeeping OUT-2C Housekeeping OUT-1C HK Common Ground Description Remarks
160
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
HK-Common HK1 DI-16 HK1 DI-14 HK1 DI-12 HK1 DI-10 HK1 DI-8 HK1 DI-6 HK1 DI-4 HK1 DI-2
HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-16 Housekeeping IN-14 Housekeeping IN-12 Housekeeping IN-10 Housekeeping IN-8 Housekeeping IN-6 Housekeeping IN-4 Housekeeping IN-2
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HK1 DI-15 HK1 DI-13 HK1 DI-11 HK1 DI-9 HK1 DI-7 HK1 DI-5 HK1 DI-3 HK1 DI-1 FG
Housekeeping IN-15 Housekeeping IN-13 Housekeeping IN-11 Housekeeping IN-9 Housekeeping IN-7 Housekeeping IN-5 Housekeeping IN-3 Housekeeping IN-1 Frame Ground
19 37
20
19.4
Table 5.4-1 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK3. Tab.42 - Connector PIN assignment for HK3 - 1st part Use Access Name HK3 Connector No. on BWB SCSU-CN22 Type of Connector Dsub 37
Tab.43 - Connector PIN assignment for HK3 - 2nd part Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 19 37 36 35 34 33 32 HK1 DO-16N HK1 DO-15N HK1 DO-14N HK1 DO-13N HK1 DO-12N Housekeeping OUT-16N Housekeeping OUT-15N Housekeeping OUT-14N Housekeeping OUT-13N Housekeeping OUT-12N 18 17 16 15 14 13 HK1 DO-16C HK1 DO-15C HK1 DO-14C HK1 DO-13C HK1 DO-12C HK1 DO-11C Housekeeping OUT-16C Housekeeping OUT-15C Housekeeping OUT-14C Housekeeping OUT-13C Housekeeping OUT-12C Housekeeping OUT-11C Description Remarks
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
161
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
HK1 DO-11N HK1 DO-10N HK1 DO-9N HK-Common HK1 DI-32 HK1 DI-30 HK1 DI-28 HK1 DI-26 HK1 DI-24 HK1 DI-22 HK1 DI-20 HK1 DI-18
Housekeeping OUT-11N Housekeeping OUT-10N Housekeeping OUT-9N HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-32 Housekeeping IN-30 Housekeeping IN-28 Housekeeping IN-26 Housekeeping IN-24 Housekeeping IN-22 Housekeeping IN-20 Housekeeping IN-18
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HK1 DO-10C HK1 DO-9C HK-Common HK1 DI-31 HK1 DI-29 HK1 DI-27 HK1 DI-25 HK1 DI-23 HK1 DI-21 HK1 DI-19 HK1 DI-17 FG
Housekeeping OUT-10C Housekeeping OUT-9C HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-31 Housekeeping IN-29 Housekeeping IN-27 Housekeeping IN-25 Housekeeping IN-23 Housekeeping IN-21 Housekeeping IN-19 Housekeeping IN-17 Frame Ground
19 37
20
19.5
Tab.45 - Connector PIN assignment for HK4 - 2nd part Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 19 37 36 35 HK2 DO-8N HK2 DO-7N Housekeeping OUT-8N Housekeeping OUT-7N 18 17 16 HK2 DO-8C HK2 DO-7C HK2 DO-6C Housekeeping OUT-8C Housekeeping OUT-7C Housekeeping OUT-6C Description Remarks
162
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
HK2 DO-6N HK2 DO-5N HK2 DO-4N HK2 DO-3N HK2 DO-2N HK2 DO-1N HK-Common HK2 DI-16 HK2 DI-14 HK2 DI-12 HK2 DI-10 HK2 DI-8 HK2 DI-6 HK2 DI-4 HK2 DI-2
Housekeeping OUT-6N Housekeeping OUT-5N Housekeeping OUT-4N Housekeeping OUT-3N Housekeeping OUT-2N Housekeeping OUT-1N HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-16 Housekeeping IN-14 Housekeeping IN-12 Housekeeping IN-10 Housekeeping IN-8 Housekeeping IN-6 Housekeeping IN-4 Housekeeping IN-2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HK2 DO-5C HK2 DO-4C HK2 DO-3C HK2 DO-2C HK2 DO-1C HK-Common HK2 DI-15 HK2 DI-13 HK2 DI-11 HK2 DI-9 HK2 DI-7 HK2 DI-5 HK2 DI-3 HK2 DI-1 FG
Housekeeping OUT-5C Housekeeping OUT-4C Housekeeping OUT-3C Housekeeping OUT-2C Housekeeping OUT-1C HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-15 Housekeeping IN-13 Housekeeping IN-11 Housekeeping IN-9 Housekeeping IN-7 Housekeeping IN-5 Housekeeping IN-3 Housekeeping IN-1 Frame Ground
19 37
20
19.6
Tab.47 - Connector PIN assignment for HK5 - 2nd part Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 19 Description Remarks
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
163
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 HK2 DO-16N HK2 DO-15N HK2 DO-14N HK2 DO-13N HK2 DO-12N HK2 DO-11N HK2 DO-10N HK2 DO-9N HK-Common HK2 DI-32 HK2 DI-30 HK2 DI-28 HK2 DI-26 HK2 DI-24 HK2 DI-22 HK2 DI-20 HK2 DI-18 Housekeeping OUT-16N Housekeeping OUT-15N Housekeeping OUT-14N Housekeeping OUT-13N Housekeeping OUT-12N Housekeeping OUT-11N Housekeeping OUT-10N Housekeeping OUT-9N HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-32 Housekeeping IN-30 Housekeeping IN-28 Housekeeping IN-26 Housekeeping IN-24 Housekeeping IN-22 Housekeeping IN-20 Housekeeping IN-18
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HK2 DO-16C HK2 DO-15C HK2 DO-14C HK2 DO-13C HK2 DO-12C HK2 DO-11C HK2 DO-10C HK2 DO-9C HK-Common HK2 DI-31 HK2 DI-29 HK2 DI-27 HK2 DI-25 HK2 DI-23 HK2 DI-21 HK2 DI-19 HK2 DI-17 FG
Housekeeping OUT-16C Housekeeping OUT-15C Housekeeping OUT-14C Housekeeping OUT-13C Housekeeping OUT-12C Housekeeping OUT-11C Housekeeping OUT-10C Housekeeping OUT-9C HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-31 Housekeeping IN-29 Housekeeping IN-27 Housekeeping IN-25 Housekeeping IN-23 Housekeeping IN-21 Housekeeping IN-19 Housekeeping IN-17 Frame Ground
19 37
20
19.7
Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel
Tab.48 shows the Connector PIN assignment for RUC. Tab.48 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC - 1st part Use Access Name RUC Connector No. on BWB SCSU-CN33 Type of Connector Dsub 25
164
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.49 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC - 2nd part Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 13 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 SG U2R CKN (O) U2R CKP (O) SG U2R DN (I) U2R DP (I) SG U2T CKN (O) U2T CKP (O) SG U2T DN (O) U2T DP (O) Signal Ground CH2 R CLK N (OUT) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) Signal Ground CH2 T DATA N (IN) 4WR CH2 T DATA P (IN) 4WR Signal Ground CH2 T CLK N (OUT) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) Signal Ground CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Description SG U1R CKN (O) U1R CKP (O) SG U1R DN (I) U1R DP (I) SG U1T CKN (O) U1T CKP (O) SG U1T DN (O) U1T DP (O) FG Remarks Signal Ground CH1 R CLK N (OUT) CH1 R CLK P (OUT) Signal Ground CH1 R DATA N (IN) 4WR CH1 R DATA P (IN) 4WR Signal Ground CH1 T CLK N (OUT) CH1 T CLK P (OUT) Signal Ground CH1 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS Frame Ground
13 25
14
Fig.116 - RUC connector
19.8
Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS
Tab.50 shows the Connector PIN assignment for PAB. Tab.50 - Connector PIN assignment for PAB Use Access Name RAB Connector No. on BWB SCSU-CN31 Type of Connector Dsub 15
Tab.51 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 8 Description COMMON Remarks
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
165
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
*ACO IN ACO IN NE ALM-N NE ALM-C
ACO Ground line Alarm Cut Off IN NE alarm (N) NE alarm (C)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FG
8 15
Fig.117 - RAB connector
166
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
19.9
Connector PIN assignment for EOW
Tab.52 shows the Connector PIN assignment for PAB. Tab.52 - Connector PIN assignment for PAB Use Access Name EOW Connector No. on BWB SCSU-CN32 Type of Connector Dsub 15
Tab.53 - Connector PIN assignment for EOW Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 E2 IN R(IN) E2-OUT R(OUT) CALL2-N SG CALL1-N E1-IN R(IN) E1-OUT R(O) 4WR E2ch R 4WS E2ch R Calling E2-N-line Signal Ground Calling E1-N-line 4WR E1ch R 4WR E1ch R 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Description E2 IN T(IN) E2-OUT T(OUT) CALL2-C SG CALL1-C E1-IN T(IN) E1-OUT T(O) FG Remarks 4WR E2ch T 4WS E2ch T Calling E2 common Signal Ground Calling E1 Common 4WR E1ch T 4WR E1ch T Frame Ground
8 15
Fig.118 - EOW connector
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
167
19.10 Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

Table 5.10-1 shows the Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC. Tab.54 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC - 1st part Use Access Name WS/UC 1 WS/UC 2 WS/UC 3 WS/UC 4 WS/UC 5 WS/UC 6 WS/UC 7 Connector No. on BWB SCSU-CN11 SCSU-CN12 SCSU-CN13 SCSU-CN14 SCSU-CN15 SCSU-CN16 SCSU-CN17 Type of Connector Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37
Tab.55 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC - 2nd part Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 19 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 SG SG SUC RTNC (O) SUC RTCP (O) SUC RTDN (O) SUC RTDP (O) SG SG SUC RRCN (O) SUC RRCP (O) SUC RRDN (I) SUC RRDP (I) SG SG SUC LTCN (O) SUC LTCP (O) SUC LTN (O) SUC LTDP (O) Signal Ground Signal Ground RADIO side TCLK (N) RADIO side TCLK (P) RADIO side TDATA (N) RADIO side TDATA (P) Signal Ground Signal Ground RADIO side RCLK (N) RADIO side RCLK (P) RADIO side RDATA (N) RADIO side RDATA (P) Signal Ground Signal Ground LINE side TCLK (N) LINE side TCLK (P) LINE side TDATA (N) LINE side TDATA (P) 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Description SG SG SUC LRCN (O) SUC LRCP (O) SUC LRDN (I) SUC LRDN (I) SG SG WSR OUT N (O) WSR OUT P (O) WSR IN N (I) WSR IN P (I) SG SG WSS OUT N (O) WSS OUT P (O) WSS IN N (I) WSS IN P (I) SG Remarks Signal Ground Signal Ground LINE side RCLK (N) LINE side RCLK (P) LINE side RDATA (N) LINE side RDATA (P) Signal Ground Signal Ground RFCOH WS OUT (N) RFCOH WS OUT (P) RFCOH WS IN (N) RFCOH WS IN (P) Signal Ground Signal Ground SOH WS OUT (N) SOH WS OUT (P) SOH WS IN (N) SOH WS IN (P) Signal Ground
168
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
19 37
20
Fig.119 - WS/UC connector
19.11 Connector PIN assignment for User Channel

Table 5.11-1 shows the Connector PIN assignment for UC. Tab.56 - Connector PIN assignment for UC - 1st part Use Access Name UC 1, 2 UC 3, 4 UC 5, 6 UC 7 Connector No. on BWB BBIU-CN65 BBIU-CN66 BBIU-CN67 BBIU-CN68 Type of Connector Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37
Tab.57 - Connector PIN assignment for UC - 2nd part Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 19 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 SG LRXUCDT N2 LRXUCDT P2 LRXUCCLK N2 LRXUCCLK P2 LTXUCDT N2 LTXUCDT P2 LTXUCCLK N2 LTXUCCLK P2 RRXUCDT N2 RRXUCDT P2 RRXUCCLK N2 Signal Ground LINE RX DATA (N) 2 LINE RX DATA (P) 2 LINE RX CLK (N) 2 LINE RX CLK (P) 2 LINE TX DATA (N) 2 LINE TX DATA (P) 2 LINE TX CLK (N) 2 LINE TX CLK (P) 2 RADIO RX DATA (N) 2 RADIO RX DATA (P) 2 RADIO RX CLK (N) 2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Description SG SG LRXUCDT N1 LRXUCDT P1 LRXUCCLK N1 LRXUCCLK P1 LTXUCDT N1 LTXUCDT P1 LTXUCCLK N1 LTXUCCLK P1 RRXUCDT N1 RRXUCDT P1 RRXUCCLK N1 Remarks Signal Ground Signal Ground LINE RX DATA (N) 1 LINE RX DATA (P) 1 LINE RX CLK (N) 1 LINE RX CLK (P) 1 LINE TX DATA (N) 1 LINE TX DATA (P) 1 LINE TX CLK (N) 1 LINE TX CLK (P) 1 RADIO RX DATA (N) 1 RADIO RX DATA (P) 1 RADIO RX CLK (N) 1
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
169
25 24 23 22 21 20
RRXUCCLK P2 RTXUCDT N2 RTXUCDT P2 RTXUCCLK N2 RTXUCCLK P2 SG
RADIO RX CLK (P) 2 RADIO TX DATA (N) 2 RADIO TX DATA (P) 2 RADIO TX CLK (N) 2 RADIO TX CLK (P) 2 Signal Ground
6 5 4 3 2 1
RRXUCCLK P1 RTXUCDT N1 RTXUCDT P1 RTXUCCLK N1 RTXUCCLK P1 SG
RADIO RX CLK (P) 1 RADIO TX DATA (N) 1 RADIO TX DATA (P) 1 RADIO TX CLK (N) 1 RADIO TX CLK (P) 1 Signal Ground
19 37
20
Fig.120 - UC connector
19.12 Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock

Coaxial Connectors, CN 1 to CN 6, located on BWB of the UIA are used for IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be set by Web LT. Tab.58 - Coaxial Connectors for External Synchronization Signal CN No. CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 Description EXT SX EXT SY T4 SX T4 SY Remarks Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Xsystem Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Ysystem
CN5
T0 SX
CN6
T0 SY
170
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
19.13 Coaxial Cable for Operation Mode "RS"

One (1) coaxial cable with DHA-26pin straight and DHA-26pin right angle connectors are needed between SV front connector and SINTCLK connector on SCSU BWB when operation mode is set to "RS". The operation setting can be set by Web LT.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
171
172
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Section 4. ACCEPTANCE TEST
20
VISUAL INSPECTION TEST
Fist of all, acceptance tests are performed to ensure that proper installation works have been finished in accordance with installation procedures in Section 3. INSTALLATION. Before acceptance tests, visual test and DC power supply voltage test will be carried out. Visual acceptance tests verify the following: Proper DC power signal wiring has been provided to the shelf. Equipment shelves and units are free of defects or damages.
The acceptance tests generally assume: Accurate and concise system designations and factory records are available to properly identify systems and equipment. Any faults found during testing are feedbacked to the installation group in charge. The test equipment required is available and properly tested and working correctly.
20.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Visual Inspection
Locate the TL radio. Position yourself at the front of the rack and remove the shelf bonnet cover. Remove all slide-in units from initial and expansion shelves. Check that the shelves are secure and free of defects or damage. Check that all electrical connectors on the shelf are properly secured and aligned in the shelf slots. Check that there are no broken, bent or mis-aligned contacts in the connectors. Check that there are no mis-aligned, dented or twisted shelves. Check that there is no broken or damaged devices (connectors, wiring, back wired boards, etc.). Check that all cabling and wiring is terminated and secured in place.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
173
10 Check that the wiring from DC power supply system is connected to the DC power terminal on the UIA block. 11 Check that the plug from the office alarm system is connected to the TL rack alarm bus (RAS) connector. 12 Check that the connections to external equipment have been made. 13 Check that the feeder connections are properly terminated. 14 Record the inspection results Note: Report any problems to the installation group.
20.2
DC Power Supply Voltage Test
This test is to check the DC power supply voltage from DC power supply system to the TL radio equipment.
20.2.1
Test Equipment Required
Digital Multimeter (DMM) or equivalent.
20.2.2
1 2
Procedure
Turn off the all non-fuse breakers on the MSTU and UIA block. Confirm the DC power supply voltage on the DC power terminal on UIA block of initial shelf and expansion shelf. Equipment specification: -48 V (-36V to -72V) If OK, continue with Step 4. If NO, report the problem to the installation group. Turn on the all no-fuse breakers on MSTU and UIA block.
3 4
Note: Actual primary DC power voltage is calculated by power cables used and specified by installation team.
174
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
21
UNIT TO THE SHELF
This chapter provides instructions to install the various units into the TL initial and expansion shelves.
21.1
Warning Message
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using or maintaining the slide-in units. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of radio equipment.
21.1.1
Laser Warning
WARNING: Never look into the end of an optical cable or fibre pigtail. PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser radiation is present. Never handle exposed fibre with bare hands or permit contact with the body. Fibre fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and remove. Fig.121 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting and receiving units:
DANGER Invisible laser radiation from connectors when uncoupled. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. Fig.121 - Laser Warning Labels
21.1.2
CAUTION
Electrostatic Discharge Warning
Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Fig.122) and require special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be strictly observed: Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling slide-in units. The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 kW. Before using the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum resistance value. Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks. Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on the units.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
175
Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and secure with tape. Return units to SIAE in special bags and original shipping containers.
Fig.122 - ESD Warning Labels
21.2
Slide-In Unit Installation Procedure
This procedure assumes that: 1 2 3 The radio equipment has been erected in accordance with national procedures. The TL rack has been installed and connected according to the procedure described in Section 3. INSTALLATION, chapter CONNECTOR AND PIN ASSIGNMENT. The procedures described in Section 4. ACCEPTANCE TEST, chapter VISUAL INSPECTION TEST, visual acceptance test have been performed.
This procedure is provided how to install the units to the shelf.
21.3
Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units
This section details the procedures to be followed for the insertion and removal of all slide-in units.
Warning
During replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into the slot. Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimize power surges during unit replacement. A slow insertion method will ensure that the slide-in units are not damaged.
21.3.1
1
Inserting a Slide-In Unit
If required, set the option switches and straps on the unit on customer requirements.
176
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Ensure the card extractor levers are fully open, then slowly press the unit into the correct mounting slot. Carefully close the top and bottom extractor levers with both hands until they latch to set the slid-in unit in the backboard connectors. The backboard connectors are keyed to only accept the card allocated to that position. See Fig.123.
Fig.123 - Inserting a Slide-in Unit Attention: Do not slam the unit into the shelf. It may damage connectors.
21.3.2
1 2
Removing a Slide-In Unit
Locate the slide-in unit to be removed. Gently pull open the top and bottom extractor levers until the slide-in unit is free from the rear connector (see Fig.124). If the unit is hard to remove, gently push the card in, then raise the extractor levers. Do not force the levers open. See Fig.124. Carefully remove the slide-in unit from the mounting shelf.
Fig.124 - Removing a Slide-in Unit
Fig.125 shows a detailed description of the extraction levers.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
177
Fig.125 - Detail of an Extractor Lever
21.3.3
1 2 3 4 5
Removing an Optical Unit (OPT BSW/OPT OCC)
Gently pull the top and bottom extractor levers out with both hands until the unit is pulled free from the backboard connector. Slowly pull the unit until it is stopped by the card stopper located at the bottom edge of the card. Disconnect the optical fibre cords if they are connected to the unit. An instruction label is located on the optical Interface unit. This label is visible when the unit is partially removed. Fit the protection caps to the optical fibre connectors and on the unit if they are not already fitted with the protection caps. Lift the metal spring on the card stopper and remove the unit completely out of the shelf. See Fig.126.
Note: Care must be taken when removing units with optical fibre cables connected to prevent undue stress being placed on the fibre cables. See chapter OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES AND JUMPERS in Section 3. INSTALLATION for optical fibre cable handling procedures.
Fig.126 - Removing an Optical Unit (OPT BSW/OPT OCC)
178
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
21.4
1
Installing the MSTU Unit

Slide the MSTU unit into its appropriate position in the MSTU block with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Fig.85 of Section 3. INSTALLATION. All of signal connections such as TX output power, RX input signal, baseband signal and DC power supply are plugged in. Tighten the front locking screws finger tight.
Attention
When you install the MSTU unit: Do not slam the unit. Tighten two locking screws at top and bottom alternately while pressing the middle of unit gently.
21.5
1
Installing SCSU Unit

Slide the SCSU unit such as SV, BSW, OPT BSW, HK, TCU, OCC INTF, OPT OCC and BSW INTF into its appropriate position in the SCSU block with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Fig.86 of Section 3. INSTALLATION. Confirm tightly plugged in.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
179
22
ON-SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST
This chapter outlines the on-site acceptance test required to commissioning of the TL radio.
22.1
Scope of On-Site Acceptance Test
On-site acceptance tests are summarized by three (3) parts: Station Test Hop Test Section Test
Fig.127 shows the scope of on-site acceptance test.
Station Name Radio Route Station Tests Hop Tests Section Tests
Fig.127 - Scope of On-site Acceptance Tests
22.2
Test Item of On-Site Acceptance Test
SIAE recommended test item of station test, hop test and section test are listed in Tab.59 below. Tab.59 - Test item of on-site acceptance test Task Name Manual Reference Station Tests Hardware Setting Provisioning (Software Setting) Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency Transmit Output Power Level Transmit Spectrum 24.1 24.2 24.3 24.4 24.5 Note
180
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Receiver (RX) AGC Range Optical Output Power Level Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level External Clock Supply Rack Alarm Test
24.6 24.7 24.8 24.9 24.10 Hop Tests
Receive (RX) Signal Level IF-IF Test IF DADE Test ATPC Test (LAB Test) Adjustment of XPIC DADE (Only for CoChannel Operation) Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test)
25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.7 Section Tests Laboratory Test only Laboratory Test only Only for co-channel operation
DCC/OW Test Wayside Traffic Test System BER Characteristics Test Synchronization Source Test
26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4
22.3
The test equipment required to carry out the acceptance tests is basically as follows: RF power meter Spectrum Analyzer Network Analyzer with sweep generator or equivalent Microwave link analyzer (70 MHz) Variable attenuator for RF Miscellaneous RF / IF cables and accessories STM-1 transmission analyzer Variable optical attenuator with SC connectors (or 1.0/2.3 type connectors) Optical power meters with SC connector (or 1.0/2.3/PC connector) Frequency counter for RF Personal Computer (Web LT)
Note: Regarding factory acceptance test items, details are discussed and finalized during Contract Negotiation.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
181
23
WAVEGUIDE/ANTENNA ORIENTATION TEST
23.1
Waveguide Sweeping
23.1.1
Procedure for Return Loss Measurement
Sweeper
Network Analyze r
Antenna
Detector Divider Detector
Waveguide Adapter
Directional Coupler
Waveguide Waveguide Transducer
Fig.128 - Return Loss Measurement 1 Connect the test equipment with the Waveguide feeder as shown in Fig.128. a b c d 2 3 4 The output of the sweep generator connects with the input of the divider. One output of the divider connects with the directional coupler and the other port of the divider connects via a detector to the network analyzer reference input. The output (forward) connection of the directional coupler connects with the waveguide adapter The reflected port of the coupler connects via a detector with the input of the network analyzer.
Calibrate the network analyzer (call menu) using the short waveguide. Configure the network analyzer for a sweep range of allocated radio frequency band. Attach the waveguide transducer to the waveguide adapter and read the reflected power directly from the display of the network analyzer. The waveguide transducer must be tuned to achieve a basically flat response (as close to flat as possible) of less than -20 dBm (theoretical value is -20 to -40 dBm). Refer to Tab.60 for theoretical return loss calculation data.
NOTE: When sweeping waveguide on the drum, a sliding load must be inserted into the open end of the waveguide to form a temporary termination (simulation of the antenna).
182
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.60 - Theoretical return loss calculation data Return Loss (dB) 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 21.0 22.0 23.0 24.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.0 29.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 Reflection Coefficient (%) 19.95 17.78 15.85 14.13 12.59 11.22 10.00 8.93 7.943 7.079 6.310 5.563 5.012 4.467 3.981 3.548 3.162 1.778 1.000 .05623 VSWR 1.50 1.43 1.38 1.33 1.29 1.25 1.222 1.196 1.173 1.152 1.135 1.119 1.106 1.094 1.083 1.074 1.065 1.036 1.020 1.011
Conversion Formulas
Return Loss: Reflection Coefficient: RL = -20log(||) || = (VSWR - 1) / (VSWR + 1)
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio: VSWR = (1+||) / (1-||)
23.2
1
Antenna Orientation
Orientate the antenna in both planes according to the site drawings (elevation angle will have to be calculated from the height above sea level). If site data is not available, adjust the antenna for 0 elevation. Settle the antenna in the horizontal plane and have a second party check the RX AGC voltage (using a spectrum analyzer) from the far-end transmitter RF signal. When the RF signal is detected, fix the peak signal level position by monitoring AGC voltage reading. Note the number of turns of the adjusting screw between the minima, actual peak signal is EXACTLY half way between the two minima. Settle the antenna in the vertical plane and do same manner as above. After completion, lock the antenna panning bars and secure.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
183
23.2.1
AGC Current Monitoring
RX AGC current of Main 1 channel (W1 CH) Main/SD receiver can be monitored through the connector CN34 of UIA block for antenna alignment and future troubleshooting.
37
19
20
Fig.129 - CN34 connector of UIA block Tab.61 - CN34 connector pin assignment CN34 of SCSU for HK1 Pin No. 9 8 7 6 Name SDA SG SD AGC AGC SG AGC MON Function Signal Ground for Monitor SD AGC monitor (W1) Signal Ground for Monitor AGC monitor (W1)
CN34 of SCSU accommodates housekeeping (external) supervisory/control terminals in addition to AGC monitoring.
23.2.2
1
Antenna XPIC Optimization
Connect a spectrum analyzer to the Horizontal waveguide port and look for the Horizontal RF signal from the distant site. Record the received signal level (RSL), R1. Next connect a spectrum analizer to the Vertical waveguide port and measure the RSL, R2. Calculate the antenna XPD = R1-R2. If calculated antenna XPD value is not met the specification, rotate the feed point on the antenna both at the local and remote sites to meet the specification. Lock the feed mounting hub after achieving maximum cross polarization discrimination.
2 3
23.3
Waveguide Pressurization and Alarm
The dehydrators and feeder pressurization tests are part of the TL radio installation. For details, refer to the Contractor's handbook for Installation, Acceptance Test procedures.
184
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
24
STATION TEST
This chapter provides instructions for station test in of the TL radio equipment.
24.1
Hardware Setting
24.1.1
Default Values
This section describes each hardware setting for the TL radio. A part of hardware settings are made at SIAE factory in accordance with Contract documentation. For factory setting items, please do not touch these hardware settings except for special cases. For detailed hardware setting items and positions, refer to chapters 24.11 Appendix - MSTU Setting and 24.12 Appendix - Hardware Setting. Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
24.2
Provisioning (Software Setting)
24.2.1
Default Values
These provisioning items allow the user to make permanent changes in the NE. Please do not change these provisioning settings except in special cases. For detailed provisioning setting items on Web LT, refer to chapter 27 MAJOR FUNCTION OF WEB LT. Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
Caution
Default values displayed on Web LT screens are initial setting values for hardware/software design, but not for your system setting. If you select Default values on a Web LT screen accidentally, the system may not function properly in some case.
24.3
Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency
This test is to check the TX local oscillator frequency of MSTU unit.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
185
24.3.1
-
HP5342A Frequency counter or equivalent Web LT
24.3.2
Tolerance
Specification
Within 10 ppm.
ON OFF P OW E R ON /OF F
Frequency
T X F M ON
Counter
Fig.130 - TX Local Frequency Measurement
24.3.3
1 2 3 4 5
Test Procedure
Allow the frequency counter at least 30 minutes to warm up. The BAND SELECT SW on the frequency counter shall be put to the specified frequency band (RF band). Set up the test circuit as shown in Fig.130 Record the TX local OSC frequency results. Compare the results with Tab.62.
Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
186
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.62 - Tolerable TX Frequency Deviation for 64QAM System RF CH No. RF Frequency (MHz) LO Frequency (MHz) Tolerance (kHz)
4 GHz band 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3,620 3,660 3,700 3,740 3,780 3,820 3,860 3,940 3,980 4,020 4,060 4,100 4,140 4,180 5 GHz band 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4,430 4,470 4,510 4,550 4,590 4,630 4,670 4,730 4,770 4,810 4,850 4,890 4,930 4,970 U6 GHz band 1 2 3 6,460 6,500 6,540 5,616 5,656 5,696 56.16 56.56 56.96 3,586 3,586 3,626 3,706 3,746 3,786 3,826 3,886 3,926 3,966 4,006 4,046 4,086 4,126 35.86 35.86 36.26 37.06 37.46 37.86 38.26 38.86 39.26 39.66 40.06 40.46 40.86 41.26 2,736 2,816 2,856 2,896 2,936 2,976 3,016 3,096 3,136 3,176 3,216 3,256 3,296 3,336 27.36 28.16 28.56 28.96 29.36 29.76 30.16 30.96 31.36 31.76 32.16 32.56 32.96 33.36
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
187
4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6,580 6,620 6,660 6,700 6,740 6,800 6,840 6,880 6,920 6,960 7,000 7,040 7,080
5,736 5,776 5,816 5,856 5,896 5,956 5,996 6,036 6,076 6,116 6,156 6,196 6,236
57.36 57.76 58.16 58.56 58.96 59.56 59.96 60.36 60.76 61.16 61.56 61.96 62.36
11 GHz band (12-pair plan) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 10,715 10,755 10,795 10,835 10,875 10,915 10,955 10,995 11,035 11,075 11,115 11,155 11,245 11,285 11,325 11,365 11,405 11,445 11,485 11,525 11,565 11,605 11,645 11,685 9,871 9,911 9,951 9,991 10,031 10,071 10,111 10,151 10,191 10,231 10,371 10,311 10,401 10,441 10,481 10,521 10,561 10,601 10,641 10,681 10,721 10,761 10,801 10,841 98.71 99.11 99.51 99.91 100.31 100.71 101.11 101.51 101.91 102.31 103.71 103.11 104.01 104.41 104.81 105.21 105.61 106.01 106.41 106.81 107.21 107.61 108.01 108.41
188
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
11 GHz band (11-pair plan) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 10,735 10,775 10,815 10,855 10,895 10,935 10,975 11,015 11,055 11,095 11,135 11,225 11,265 11,305 11,345 11,385 11,425 11,465 11,505 11,545 11,585 11,625 9,891 9,931 9,971 10,011 10,051 10,091 10,131 10,171 10,211 10,251 10,291 10,421 10,461 10,501 10,541 10,581 10,621 10,661 10,701 10,741 10,781 10,821 98.91 99.31 99.71 100.11 100.51 100.91 101.31 101.71 102.11 102.51 102.91 104.21 104.61 105.01 105.41 105.81 106.21 106.61 107.01 107.41 107.81 108.21
Tab.63 - Tolerable TX Frequency Deviation for 128QAM System RF CH No. RF Frequency (MHz) LO Frequency (MHz) Tolerance (kHz)
4 GHz band 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 3,824.5 3,853.5 3,882.5 3,911.5 3,940.5 3,969.5 4,037.5 4,066.5 4,095.5 4,124.5 2,980.5 3,009.5 3,038.5 3,067.5 3,096.5 3,125.5 3,193.5 3,222.5 3,251.5 3,280.5 29.805 30.095 30.385 30.675 30.965 31.255 31.935 32.225 32.515 32.805
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
189
5 6
4,153.5 4,182.5
3,309.5 3,338.5
33.095 33.385
L6 GHz Band 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5,945.20 5,974.85 6,004.50 6,034.15 6,063.80 6,093.45 6,123.10 6,152.75 6,197.24 6,226.89 6,256.54 6,286.19 6,315.84 6,345.49 6,375.14 6,404.79 5,101.20 5,130.85 5,160.50 5,190.15 5,219.80 5,249.45 5,279.10 5,308.75 5,353.24 5,392.89 5,412.54 5,442.19 5,471.84 5,501.49 5,531.14 5,560.79 51.0120 51.3085 51.6050 51.9015 52.1980 52.4945 52.7910 53.0875 53.5324 53.9289 54.1254 54.4219 54.7184 55.0149 55.3114 55.6079
L7 GHz Band 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 7,135 7,163 7,191 7,219 7,247 7,296 7,324 7,352 7,380 7,408 U7 GHz Band 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 7,442 7,470 7,498 7,526 7,554 7,596 7,624 6,598 6,626 6,654 6,682 6,710 6,752 6,780 65.98 66.26 66.54 66.82 67.10 67.52 67.80 6,291 6,319 6,347 6,375 6,403 6,452 6,480 6,508 6,536 6,564 62.91 63.19 63.47 63.75 64.03 64.52 64.52 65.08 65.08 65.64
190
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
3 4 5
7,652 7,680 7,708 L8 GHz Band
6,808 6,836 6,864
68.08 68.36 68.64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7,747.70 7,777.35 7,807.00 7,836.65 7,866.30 7,895.95 7,925.60 7,955.25 8,059.02 8,088.67 8,118.32 8,147.97 8,177.62 8,207.27 8,236.92 8,266.57
6,903.7 6,933.35 6,963 6,992.65 7,022.3 7,051.95 7,081.5 7,111.25 7,215.02 7,244.67 7,274.32 7,303.97 7,333.62 7,363.27 7,392.92 7,422.57
69.037 69.3335 69.63 69.9265 70.223 70.5195 70.815 71.1125 72.1502 72.4467 72.4467 73.0397 73.3362 73.6327 73.9292 74.2257
13 GHz Band 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12,765 12,793 12,821 12,849 12,877 12,905 12,933 12,961 13,031 13,059 13,087 13,115 13,143 13,171 13,199 13,227 11,921 11,949 11,977 12,005 12,033 12,061 12,089 12,117 12,187 12,215 12,243 12,271 12,299 12,327 12,355 12,383 119.21 119.49 119.77 120.05 120.33 120.61 120.89 121.17 121.87 122.15 122.43 122.71 122.99 123.27 123.55 123.83
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
191
24.4
Transmit Output Power Level
This test is to check the output power of the MSTU unit.
24.4.1
-
HP436A/HP8481A Power meter with sensor or equivalent. HP8491A Fixed attenuator (30dB) or equivalent. Web LT
24.4.2
-
Specification
+29 dBm or +32 dBm 1 dB for 4 - L8 GHz band +29 dBm 1 dB for 11 GHz band +27 dBm 1 dB for 13 GHz band
TX output power TX output power TX output power
24.4.3
Test Procedure
Upper view of MSTU adaptor
ADPT
ATT 30 dB
Power Meter
SMA Coaxial Connector
TX
ON OFF P OW E R ON /OF F
RX
SD
TX port: Transmitter output RX: port: Main RX input SD port: SD RX input
T X F M ON
Fig.131 - TX Output Power Measurement TX Output Power Measurement Procedure (in case of SNMP-NMS) 1 192 Turn off power SW on MSTU.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
2 3
Remove the RF OUT cable on MSTU adapter labelled "TX" Connect power meter to the RF connector of "TX". If the maximum range of the power meter is less than the rated output power level of MSTU, insert fixed and calibrated attenuator between the TX connector and the power meter. Turn on power SW of the MSTU. Read the power meter indication. If the measured power is out of the rated level, set the rotary switch position to "5" and push "INCR" and "DECR" button to be within specification. To memorize the setting, select item No. = 9 of rotary switch, then press INCR/DECR switches together.
4 5 6 7
TX Output Power Monitoring Procedure

1 2 3 4 5 Log on Web LT to TL. Go to "Status Control" "Analog Monitor" "Display Current Level" Request the latest data. Confirm the displayed data. When the power level is out of the rated power 3 dB, TX alarm will be reported.
24.5
Transmit Spectrum
This test is to test the TX Spectrum
24.5.1
Spectrum Analyzer.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
193
24.5.2
Specification
dB + 10 + 1.0 64 QAM, 40 MHz spacing 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 - 50 - 60 - 70 - 80 42.5M H z - 65 dB 27.5M H z - 35 dB 17.5M H z + 1 dB
10
15 20 25 30 R F F r equency (M H z)
35
40
dB + 10 + 1.0 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 - 50 - 60 - 70 - 80 31.5 M H - 65 dB 21 M H z - 35 dB 13 M H z + 1 dB 124 QAM, 28, 29, 30 MHz spacing
10
15 20 25 30 R F F r equency (M H z)
35
40
Fig.132 - Transmitter Output Spectrum
24.5.3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Test Procedure
Remove the Duplexer output waveguide in Fig.132. Connect the spectrum analyzer with the Duplexer output. Turn on the Power SW of the under test MTSU. Compare the results to the specification (use Delta markers or mask) Turn off the Power SW for next channel measurement. Repeat steps 3 and 5 for other channels Restore the connections. Turn on all MSTU power SWs.
194
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
MSTU front view
Example of detail configuration of BRU for 1+1, with SD System
MAIN (V)
Transduse
SD (V)
MAIN (V)
Transduse B ?R ?U @ @ Circulato
SD (V)
B ?R ?U @ @ Circulato Dummy Loa
CH 1
CH 1
RX BP CH 1
CH 1
CH 1
CH RX BP 3
CH RX BP 3
CH 3 TX BP
CH 3
CH 3 TX BP
MAIN-1 SD
PROT SD
OF F P OW E R ON /OF F
T X F M ON
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Fig.133 - Set-up of Transmit Spectrum Measurement
24.6
Receiver (RX) AGC Range
This test is to check the AGC range of MAIN RX and SD RX independently. This test should be carried out after the IF output level test, and for that reason the IF output test has been included.
24.6.1

0 to 80 dB RF attenuator and coaxial cables for RF and IF. HP436A/HP8483A Power meter with sensor or equivalent Web LT.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
PROT SD
ON
MAIN-1 SD
PROT TX
PROT R
PROT TX
MAIN-1
MAIN-1
MAIN-1
MAIN-1
PROT R
CH 3
RX BP CH 1
195
24.6.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Test Procedure
Using Web LT set the AGC to "ON" Connect the power meter to the RX IF MAIN MON Check (adjust if required) the IF level (-10 dBm 1 dB). Connect the attenuator between the MAIN RF input and the MAIN RF output of BRU. Adjust for the minimum attenuation. Measure the RSL with the power meter. Adjust the attenuator slowly increasing the attenuation until the specified RSL (-76 dBm for 64 QAM and -74 dBm for 128 QAM). Confirm the IF level remains within the limits (-10 dBm 1 dB). Connect the power meter to the RX IF PROT MON.
10 Check (adjust if required) the IF level. (-10 dBm 1 dB). 11 Connect the attenuator between the MAIN RF input and the MAIN RF output of BRU. 12 Adjust for the minimum attenuation. 13 Measure the RSL with the power meter. 14 Adjust the attenuator slowly increasing the attenuation until the specified RSL (-76 dBm for 64 QAM and -74 dBm for 128 QAM). 15 Confirm the IF level remains within the limits (-10 dBm 1 dB). 16 Record the results in your Data Recording Forms. 17 Restore the connections. Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
196
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
From Main Antenna
From SD Antenna
MAIN (V)
Transduser
SD (V)
Circulator
Dummy Load
CH 1
CH 1
CH 3
CH 3
RX BPF
TX BPF
SD IF OUT
CH 3
MAIN-1 SD RX PROT SD RX PROT RX
ON MN IF OU
PROT TX
OF F
P OW E R ON /OF F
Variable
T X F M ON
Attenuator 0 ... 80 dB
IF POWER METER
MSTU
Front
Fig.134 - Set-up of AGC Range Measurement
24.7
Optical Output Power Level
This test describes the Optional Characteristics tests for the TL radio equipment.
24.7.1
Optical Power Meter
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-1 TX
RX BPF
CH 1
197
24.7.2
Specification
S-1.1 -8 ... -15 dBm L-1.1 0 ... -5 dBm
24.7.3
Test Procedure
To measure the Optical Output Power of OPT INTF unit. Provisioning 1 2 3 4 5 Clean and inspect the optical connections. Connect the optical power meter to optical signal output of the OPT INTF unit through the SC optical fibre. Verify that the optical output power is within specification. Record the results. Repeat for all OPT INTF units. IS (for all units) ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) OFF
Note: Report any problems to the commssioning group.

Optical Power Meter
STM -1 Output STM -1 Input
Optical cable connector
OPT BSW(M1)
OPT BSW(M2)
OPT BSW(M3)
OPT BSW(M1)
OPT BSW(M2)
OPT BSW(M3)
OPT OCC
OPT OCC
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
Side View of OPT
BSW unit
Fig.135 - Optical Output Power Measurement 198
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
24.8
Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level
This test is to measure the minimum (MIM) and maximum (MAX) optical receive levels of the TL radio.
24.8.1
Test Procedure
To measure the receive levels: 1 2 3 Maintain the optical attenuator set-up. Slowly increase the optical attenuation until the LINE LED lights. This indicates the B2 MIN alarm threshold has been crossed. Reduce the attenuation by 1 dB to remove the alarm. Note: The B2 alarm will not clear immediately, allow time for the alarm to clear before proceeding. 4 5 6 7 Remove the patchcord from the receiver and connect it into the optical power meter. Use Web LT to override the safety interlock. (Status/Control...Control Panel...ALS Release) Click on the OK command button to fire the laser for 90 seconds. Record the measurement
Note: Steps 8 and 9 are optional. They check that the maximum input level to the OPT INTF unit (according to the specification) does not overload the optical receiver. 8 For OPT BSW 2 (L.1-1), decrease the attenuation until a reading of -10 dBm is observed on the power meter. (Approximately 8 dB attenuation.) For OPT BSW1 (S.1-1), decrease the attenuation until a reading of -8 dBm is observed on the power meter. (Approximately 0 dB attenuation.)
10 Disconnect the patchcord from the power meter and reconnect it to the receiver. 11 Verify that the B2 MIN alarm has cleared, and the PRBS is error-free, indicating that the OPT INTF is within specification. 12 Record the results. 13 Adjust the optical attenuator to 15 dB. 14 Repeat the procedure from Step 2 for the remaining OPT INTF units. Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
199
Optical Attenuator
Optical Power Meter
STM-1 Output STM-1 Input
Optical cable Connector

OPT BSW(M1) OPT BSW(M2) OPT BSW(M3) OPT BSW(M1) OPT BSW(M2) OPT BSW(M3) OPT OCC OPT OCC TCU-Y TCU-X HK1 HK2
Side View of OPT BSW unit

Fig.136 - Optical Receive Levels Test Set Up
24.9
External Clock Supply
This test is to check the external clock supply of the TL radio.
24.9.1
Warning Messages
Refer to the warning messages detailed in chapter 21.1 Warning Message.
200
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
24.9.2
Test Procedure
For equipment configured for external or tributary timing only. To test the external clock: 1 2 Connect the frequency counter to the T0 CLK OUT MON coaxial connector CN 5 or CN 6 located on SCSU BWB, by using the clock monitor patchcord. Does the frequency counter indicate within the limits specified in Tab.64? 3 4 If YES, STOP, proceed to Step 4. If NO, continue with Step 3.
Resolve the problem through local procedures by ensuring that the selected source of synchronisation is present and valid. If external timing is used, disconnect the clock primary and secondary sources from the TL. Verify that an alarm appears on the local terminal (FLEXR).
Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group. Tab.64 - External Clock Frequency Limits Clock Source External timing (1.8 ppm) Tributary timing (50 ppm) CLK frequency lower limit 2.047996 MHz 2.047897 MHz CLK frequency upper limit 2.048004 MHz 2.048103 MHz
W /C BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF
WC BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF
DUP SD RX TX BRU
Frequency Counter
MSTU
MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
OCC INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1) HK2 HK1 TCU-Y TCU-X OCC INTF BSW(M3) BSW(M2) BSW(M1)
Detail
SCSU
NFB1 NFB2 NFB3 NFB4
CN 1
CN 3
CN 5
SV
CN 2 CN 4 CN 6
Connectors
CN 11
TERM
UIA
Fig.137 - External Clock Frequency Measurement
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
201
24.10 Rack Alarm Test

This test is to check the rack alarms.
24.10.1
Multi Meter
24.10.2
1 2 3
Test procedure
Generate warning, minor, major and critical alarms. Confirm contact closure with the multi-meter. Apply closure to the alarm ACO input and confirm the ACO activation.
FRX Radio Equipmen

+ 5V L M ulti M eter + 5V R
Rack Alarm BUS Output
COMMON + 5V
AC O I N
P hoto C oupler 0V ?|V SG
C OM M ON
CN 31 on SCSU BWB
Fig.138 - Rack Alarm Bus Test Set-Up Tab.65 - Rack Alarm Bus Pinouts Pin No Description Remarks Pin No 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 *ACO IN ACO IN ACO Ground line Alarm Cut Off IN NE alarm (N) NE alarm (C) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FG Frame Ground Description COMMON Remarks
202
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
24.11 Appendix - MSTU Setting

MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) is set and tuned at the factory and commissioning test is to assure the system performance. There is no need to carry out any setting change or re-adjustment for MSTU. SIAE strongly recommends not to attempt to change or re-adjust settings unless the error performance degraded seriously due to equipment deterioration. For above case, please contact SIAE's very skilled technical staffs who may have any chances to change or re-adjust settings in some special circumstances.
Warning
Do not attempt to change or re-adjust settings of MSTU unless seriously needed.If needed, use the Web LT as the first priority. In case of single antenna reception (without SD), remove all straps of "DADE" (8) J1 to J32. Fig.139 shows the front panel of MSTU unit and Tab.66 shows the functions of MSTU front panel.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
203
24.11.1
MSTU Front Panel
FAN (1)
70M IN (5) FAN PWR (2)

ON OF F
POWER IN/OFF (3)
REF I/O (6) MN 70M OUT SD (7) DADE (8)
TX F MON (4)
D-EQL (9)
XPIC OUT (10) XPIC IN (11) INCR DECR ITEM No. UNIT/RCI LINE (13)
Fig.139 - Front Panel of MSTU unit
Factory use only. ITEM No. must be 0 for normal operation (12)
204
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.66 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Item FAN FAN PWR POWER ON/OFF TX LO MON 70M IN REF I/O 70M OUT MN 70M OUT SD DADE D-EQL XPIC OUT (master) XPIC IN (slave) INCR DECR ITEM No. LED indicator UNIT/RCI LINE Function 4 air cooling fans for transmitter power amplifier Power cable connector for cooling fans Non-fuse breaker of DC power supply Monitor terminal for TX local frequency 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the FLEXR 70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD antenna reception DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference See Tab.68 and Tab.69 for setting. Remove all straps in case of single antenna reception (without SD) Delay equalizer for branching network XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal XPIC input terminal for Co-Channel operation Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only) Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a Web LT terminal for maintenance See the next page for details. To memorize the setting, select ITEM No. = 9, then press INCR/DECR switches together Alarm/status indicator: Normal = greena, Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking Normal = greena., Line failure = red on
8 9 10 11
12
13 a.
Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the Web LT
Tab.67 shows the relationship between the position of rotary switch and functions of "Analog Level Setting" (12). Tab.67 - Function of Rotary Switch (12) No 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Item Normal operation DADE for XPIC DELAY-H DELAY-M DELAY-L ALC LVL ALC GAIN SD GAIN SD SLOPE
a b a. b. a.
Function The position for normal operation, in service state.INCR and DECR push switches are invalid. Compensates DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer) between Vertical and Horizontal polarization in case of co-channel operation Adjusts IF-IF group delay, high frequency component. Adjusts IF-IF group delay, medium frequency component Adjusts IF-IF group delay, low frequency component Sets TX output level at ALC AUTO (ON) Sets TX output level at ALC MNL (OFF) Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF to compensate the loss of DADE line. Adjusts XPIC OUT slope at AGC OFF to compensate the slope of DADE line.
a.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
205
9 A B C D E F a. b. c.
RRF GAIN RIF GAIN R SLOPE T SLOPE
a. a. c
Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF Compensates the slope of Main line Compensates the slope of TX The position for normal operation, in service state For FAN replacement, inhibits FAN alarm and switches TX output to LOW level
Normal operation FAN replacement
Use the web LT for setting Not applicable for SNMF-NMS Do not attempt to re-adjust.
To memorize the setting, select ITEM No. = 9, then press INCR/DECR switches together.
24.11.2
DADE setting for SD
The difference of waveguide length between Main and SD antenna shall be compensated by DADE (8). Tab.68 - Strap pin for SD DADE adjustment No use J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 2 ns
4 ns
4 ns
10 ns
10 ns
20 ns
30 ns
40 ns
See Tab.69 for example of SD DADE setting.
206
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.69 - DADE setting for SD Strap position vs Delay difference between Main and SD antenna 0 ns 2 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 2 ns J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 4 ns J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 10 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 18 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 36 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 110 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32
4 ns
4 ns
10 ns
10 ns
20 ns
30 ns
40 ns
0 ns: Keep all straps as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J7 and so on. 2 ns: Strap J1 to J2, J3 to J4, but keep others as default, J5 to J7, J6 to J7 and so on. 4 ns: Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on. 10 ns: Strap J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J7, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on. 14 ns: Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4 and so on. Attention: In case of single antenna reception (without SD), remove all straps J1 to J32.
24.12 Appendix - Hardware Setting
24.12.1
Hardware Setting Position
Most of system settings are set through Web LT. However, some part of system setting shall be carried out by hardware switches. These settings are completed at the factory test according to the system data and standard value. If any change of these parameters is needed on site, follow this instruction.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
207
Tab.70 - Hardware Setting Position Unit Item EXT 2M CLK (Y) input Switch SW81 Setting Balance Unbalanced Balance Unbalanced Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Balance Unbalanced Balance Unbalanced 75 ohms unbalanced 120 ohms balance 75 ohms 120 ohms balance Balance Unbalanced 75-ohm unbalanced 120-ohm balanced 75-ohm unbalanced 120-ohm balanced Balanced Unbalanced ALM1 ALM2 ALM3 CONT1/CONT2 ALS Mode Setting (factory Use) (Factory Use) 0 (default) 1 (default) A (default) 0 (default) 1 (default) OFF (default) OFF (default) default default default default default default default default default default default default default Default default
EXT 2M CLK (X) input
SW82
EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern TCU EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern
SW71, 72
SW73, 74
T0, T4 CLK output pattern
SW75 CN64 (T4) CN65 (T0) SW2B
Power supply switch
CMI input
WS input for 75 ohms BSW WS output
SW25 (RFCOH) SW28 (SOH) SW75 (RFCOH) SW77 (SOH) SW24 (RFCOH) SW27 (SOH)
WS input
OCC INTF
CMI input
SW29 SW26 (RFCOH) SW29 (SOH) SW28 (RFCOH) SW2A (SOH) SW28 (RFCOH) SW2B (SOH) SW33
WS output
WS input
WS input for 75-ohm OPT BSW ALM/COND Out
SW25 SW24
CONT1/2 In ALS Mode MISC (Test)
SW23 SW22 SW55 SW32
Fig.140 and Fig.141 show the position of switches.
208
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
24.12.2
TCU unit
Tab.71 - TCU unit Item Switch SW81 Setting Balance Unbalanced Balance Unbalanced Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Position BAL UNBAL BAL UNBAL BIP RZ BIP RZ BIP RZ BIP RZ
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input
EXT 2M CLK (X) input
SW82
EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern
SW71, 72
SW73, 74
T0, T4 CLK output pattern
SW75 CN64 (T4) CN65 (T0)
Power supply
TOP
CN 65 CN64 SW75 CN92 SW82 SW81 CN64, 65 BIP RZ (default) BIP BAL UNBAL (default) RZ (default)
SW74
SW73
SW72
TCU
unit
SW71
SW71 to 75
SW81, 82
Fig.140 - TCU setting
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
CN96
209
24.12.3
BSW unit
Tab.72 - BSW unit Item Switch SW2B SW25 (RFCOH) SW28 (SOH) SW75 (RFCOH) SW77 (SOH) SW24 (RFCOH) SW27 (SOH) Setting Balance Unbalanced Balance Unbalanced 75 ohms unbalanced 120 ohms balance 75 ohms 120 ohms balance Position BAL UNBAL BAL UNBAL 75 120 75 120
CMI input
WS input for 75 ohms
WS output
WS input
SW2B
TOP
CN96 SW77 SW75 CN92
SW28
SW27
SW25
SW24
BSW unit
SW24, 25 75 (default) 120
SW2B, 27, 28 BAL (default) UNBAL
SW75, 77
75 120 (default)
Fig.141 - BSW unit
210
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
24.12.4
OPT BSW unit

Tab.73 - OPT BSW unit Item Switch SW26 (RFCOH) SW29 (SOH) Setting 75 ohm unbalanced 120 ohm balance 75 ohm 120 ohm balance Balance Unbalanced HK Output1 HK Output2 HK Output3 HK Input Setting ALS Mode Setting (Factory Use) (Factory Use) Position 75 (default) 120 75 (default) 120 BAL (default) UNBAL 0 (default) 1 (default) A (default) 0 (default) 1 (default) OFF (default) OFF (Default)
WS output
WS input
SW28 (RFCOH) SW2A (SOH)
WS input for 75 ohms
SW28 (RFCOH) SW2B (SOH)
ALM/COND Out
SW33 SW25 SW24
CONT1/2 In ALS Mode MISC (Test)
SW23 SW22 SW55 SW32
SW2B SW2A (Rear) SW55 OPT SW22 SW23 SW32 BSW unit SW 22, SW23, SW24, SW25, SW33 120 SW32, SW55 O F F 1 2 3 4 SW29 SW28 SW27 SW26 SW24 SW25 SW33
SW28, SW2B
SW 26, SW27, SW29, SW2A
UNBAL
BAL (default)
75 (default)
Fig.142 - OPT BSW Setting
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
211
25
HOP TEST
This chapter describes the Hop Test procedures to be carried out after Station Tests have been completed.
ATTENTION
DO NOT attempt to re-tune any adjustment point, if the test result is within the specification.
25.1
Receive (RX) Signal Level
This test is intend to confirm the result of antenna alignment by measuring the RF receiving level at the input of MSTU.
25.1.1

RF Power Meter Web LT
Test set-up
Set up the test circuit as shown below.
Trans dus er
BRU
Circulator Dummy Load
MN RF OUT
CH 1' CH 1 CH 1' CH 3' PROT RX RX MAIN- 1 SD RX BPF
SD RF OUT
CH 3
CH 3'
RX BPF
TX BPF
POW ER METER
POW ER SENSOR
Fig.143 - Receiver Input Power measurement
212
MAIN- 1 RX
MAIN- 1 TX
PROT TX
PROT S D
RX
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
25.1.2
1
Test Procedure
Preparation for measurement a b Set the CAL FACTOR on power meter to the corresponding figures on power sensor at measured frequency range. Perform the zero calibration on power meter before measurement.
2 3
Set up the test circuit as shown in Fig.143. Record the power meter reading a b Measure the received signal level at branching filter output port for both Main & SD. Return each setting to normal condition.
Confirm the converted value by following formula is satisfied with specification by comparison with the calculation value of attached sheet ("Received Signal Level Calculation Sheet as shown in Tab.74. Received Signal Level = Power meter reading - Loss of MSTU adaptor (RX side)
25.1.3
Specification
Within (System design calculation value) + 6 dB/- 3 dB. Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
RF Frequency: ______ MHz Ant. Diameter = ______ m Ant. Diameter = ______ m
Actual Feeder Length, L (m)
Hop distance = ______ km Polarization: V H
Actual Feeder Length, L (m)
BF + dBm TX
A
BF B RX dBm
Station: __________
Parameter Transmitter Output Power MSTU Adaptor Loss (TX+RX) Branching Network Loss (TX+RX) Type
Station: __________
Loss in dB dB dB dB Gain in dB dBm
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
213
Feeder Loss
TX side RX side TX side RX side (1)
dB dB dB dB dB (2) dB
Antenna Gain
Free Space Loss (=20log(4D/)) Sum of Loss and Gain
Calculated Received Signal Level ((2)-(1)) = ________ dBm (3) Measured Received Signal Level = ________ dBm (4) Difference ((4)-(3) = _______ dB Note: Feeder loss shall be calculated based on technical data. Fig.144 - Received Signal Level (RSL) Calculation Sheet
25.2
IF-IF Test
This test is intend to measure the IF-IF characteristics at normal propagation condition for main receiver and SD receiver independently.
25.2.1
-
Microwave Link Analyzer, ME435K or equivalent HP436A/HP8483A Power meter with sensor or equivalent Web LT
25.2.2
Specification
Amplitude TL equipment Antenna/ Waveguide Total system per hop < 2.0 dB < 0.5 dB < 2.5 dB
Group Delay < 15 ns < 5 ns < 20 ns SIAE recommendation
Frequency Range: 70 MHz 12.0 MHz for 64/128QAM system Note: In order to satisfy the system requirement, SIAE would like to recommend to use the antenna and waveguide system which meet the above specification.
214
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
25.2.3
Test Procedure
If Space Diversity system is applied, this test should be done for MAIN receiver and SD receiver independently. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Remove the SD RX RF input cable. Set RX side "Frequency Measure Operate" via Web LT. Set Microwave Link Analyzer, for IF-IF TEST listed on Tab.74. Connect OUTPUT of Microwave Link Analyzer to 70M INPUT connector of MTSU. Set the RX RF GAIN for -10dBm measured at the MN 70M OUT (SD 70M OUT will be set simultaneously). Set the RX IF GAIN for -10dBm measured at the XPIC OUT. Connect XPIC OUT of MTSU to INPUT of Microwave Link Analyzer. Compare the results to the specification (use markers or mask). Replace the SD RX RF input cable and remove the MAIN RX RF input cable.
10 Set the SD GAIN for -10dBm measured at the XPIC OUT. 11 Connect XPIC OUT of MTSU to INPUT of Microwave Link Analyzer. 12 Compare the results to the specification (use markers or mask). 13 If any remarkable points beyond the specification observed, check the antenna and/or waveguide connection again. Note: Report any problems to the comminssioning group. Tab.74 - Set-up Data for IF-IF TEST Link TX Settings Baseband frequency Deviation Sweep width IF Frequency IF Level 250 kHz 250 kHz 14.0 M Hz/12.0 M Hz 70 MHz -10.0 dBm TX RX TL Settings ALC OFF AGC OFF EPS OFF
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
215
SLD MRK: 14.00 MHz IF : - 10 dBm FM: 255 kHz rms, BF : 250 kHz
Y1
Y2
Marker
Marker
Y1: IF AMPL: 0.5 dB/div
Y2: DELAY: 2 ns/div
Fig.145 - Amplitude and Delay Characteristics
216
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
IF IN
MAIN IFMON
ON OF F P OW E R ON /OF F ON
Microwave Link Analyzer (Transmitter)
SD IFMON
OF F P OW E R ON /OF F
DADE setting for SD
T X F M ON
XPIC OUT
Microwave Link Analyzer (Receiver)
T X F M ON
Fig.146 - Set-up for IF to IF TEST
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
217
25.3
IF DADE Test
This test is intended to confirm the IF DADE function at normal propagation condition.
25.3.1
IF DADE Test Procedure
Refer to Figure 6.2 for IF DADE Test set-up. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Set RX side "Frequency Measure Operate" via Web LT. Set Microwave Link Analyzer or equivalent, for IF-IF TEST listed on Table 6.1. Connect OUTPUT of Microwave Link Analyzer to IF INPUT connector of MTSU. Confirm that the MAIN IF OUT level is -10dBm. Confirm that the SD IF OUT level is -10dBm. Confirm that the XPIC OUT level is -10dBm. Connect XPIC OUT connector of MTSU to INPUT of Microwave Link Analyzer. Set RX side "SDDADE OFF" and "EPS OFF" via Web LT. Confirm that the delay difference displayed on the Microwave Link Analyzer is less than 1 ns.
10 If the delay difference is not less than 1 ns, change the delay line for IF DADE so as to achieve the difference of 1 ns. Refer to Figure 6.2. See "A-1.2 DADE setting for SD" of this part. Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
25.4
ATPC Test (LAB Test)
This test is intended to measure the ATPC. (Laboratory Test)
25.4.1

Variable RF attenuator Web LT
25.4.2
1 2 3 4
Test Procedure
Remove RF IN, MAIN and SD cables. Insert the variable attenuator between the MAIN RF OUT of the branching network and MAIN RF input of the RX. Adjust for minimum attenuation. Check on Web LT for the TX power level at the remote site by: Status/control Shelf condition Select TX, M1 / PROT
218
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Increase the attenuation for RSL ATPC activation point from the NORMAL POWER to the HIGH POWER (-40, -50 or -60 dBm selectable) Repeat step 4 and check for HIGH POWER Remove the attenuator and wait for ATPC restore time from the HIGH POWER to the NORMAL POWER (1, 4, or 15 mins). The NORMAL POWER is dynamic varying the level due to the propagation loss. Repeat step 4 and check for no alarm (normal) Restore connections.
6 7
8 9
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
219
MAIN
SD ANTENNA
Remote Station Transmitter
MAIN (V)
Transduser
SD (V)
BRU
Circulator Dummy Load
CH 1
CH 1
CH 3
CH 3
RX BPF
TX BPF
CH 3
RX BPF
CH 1
ON
P OW E R ON /OF F
PROT TX
OF F
T X F M ON
Variable Attenuator 0 ... 80 dB
Fig.147 - ATPC Test Set-Up
220
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
MAIN-1 SD RX
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-1 TX
PROT SD RX
PROT RX
25.5
Adjustment of XPIC DADE (Only for Co-Channel Operation)
XPIC DADE (Cross Polarization Interference Canceller Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer) is provided to assure the XPIC function. XPIC DADE compensates difference of waveguide length between for vertical and horizontal polarization.
25.5.1

Microwave Link Analyzer, ME435K or equivalent IF Switcher, M02L-1213-0763 (by SIAE) Web LT
25.5.2
Not specified -
Specification
Not necessary to execute this adjustment, if Execute this adjustment, if
Delay difference 5 ns Delay difference > 5 ns
Transmit end MSTU TX (V) Same polarization
Receive end MSTU RX (V) XPIC OUT INPUT 1 IF Switcher
IF IN Opposite polarization
MSTU RX (V)
XPIC OUT INPUT 2 OUTPUT
Microwave Link Analyzer (Transmitter)
Microwave Link A nalyzer (Receiver)
Fig.148 - XPIC DADE set-up
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
221
INPUT 1 2
CLOCK 100 20
TEST OFF ON
SELECT 1 2
OUTPUT
Fig.149 - IF switcher 1 2 100 20 OFF TEST ON 1 2 IF input from XPIC OUT of MSTU (same polarization) IF input from XPIC OUT of MSTU (opposite polarization) Switching frequency is 100 Hz in case of TEST = OFF Switching frequency is 20 Hz in case of TEST = OFF
INPUT
CLOCK
[INPUT 1] and [INPUT 2] are selected alternately at the frequency of CLOCK = 100 Hz or 20Hz [INPUT 1] or [INPUT 2] is selected manually by SELECT = 1 or 2 [INPUT 1] signal is selected in case of TEST = ON [INPUT 2] signal is selected in case of TEST = ON IF output to Microwave Link Analyzer (Receiver)
SELECT OUTPUT
25.5.3
1 2 3 4 5
Test Procedure
Maintain FLEXR settings as normal. Set up the measurement circuit as Fig.150. Turn on the power switch of IF Switcher. See Tab.74 for the setting of Microwave Link Analyzer. Set the IF Switcher: CLOCK = 100 or 20, TEST = OFF Set ITEM No. SW (3) of TX MSTU to "6 = ALC OFF". Set ITEM No. SW (3) of RX MSTUs to "1 = DADE for XPIC". Measure IF-IF delay. Set DADE by pressing INCR (1)/DECR (2) according to Case A, B and C of Fig.150.
6 7 8 9
222
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Case A 70M IN
Delay Difference < 5 ns ON
OF F Case B INPUT 1 (same pol arization) Delay Difference > 5 ns INPUT 2 XPIC OUT XPIC IN Case C INCR (1) MSTU DECR (2) ITEM No. (3) INPUT 2 (opposite polarization) Delay Difference > 5 ns INPUT 1 (same polarization) (opposite polarization)
Fig.150 - 3 cases of Delay Difference
How to set DADE

Case A: Delay difference 5 ns Do not adjust it, but leave as it is.
Case B: Press
Delay difference >5 ns Delay of INPUT 1 > Delay of INPUT 2
INCR (1) of MSTU RX (A), then DECR (2) of MSTU RX (B) more than 1 second each.
How to identify INPUT 1/INPUT 2: when you turn [TEST] to [ON], and [SELECT] to [INPUT 1] of the IF Switcher, the image will appear from the top of display. When you turn [SELECT] to [INPUT 2], the image will appear from the bottom of display. Case C: Delay difference >5 ns Delay of INPUT 2 > Delay of INPUT 1
Press
DECR (2) of MSTU RX (A), then INCR (1) of MSTU RX (B) more than 1 second each.
How to identify INPUT 1/INPUT 2: When you turn [TEST] to [ON], and [SELECT] to [INPUT 1] of the IF Switcher, the image will appear from the bottom of display. When you turn [SELECT] to [INPUT 2], the image will appear from the top of display.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
223
How to memorize the setting

After Case B or C, press INCR (1) and DECR (2) of MSTU RX (A) together. Repeat it on MSTU RX (B). Finally, set ITEM No. SW (3) of all MSTUs to "0 = Normal operation".
25.6
Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test
To check the operation of the Radio Protection Switch function.
25.6.1

Web LT MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent Patch cords, attenuators and cables.
25.6.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Test Procedure
Remove MAIN and SD RX of RF input cable. Insert variable attenuator between RF INPUT of MSTU and RX RF OUTPUT of BRU. Configure test equipment as per Fig.146 Confirm error free transmission prior to commencement of testing (5 minute test). Increase the attenuation of the ATT slowly and confirm, via Web LT that a radio protection switch by USW has occurred. Confirm that the SDH analyser is error free. Decrease the attenuation of the ATT slowly and confirm, via Web LT that a radio protection switch has restored. Confirm that the SDH analyser is error free. Repeat steps 3 to 8 for the other MAIN channels (if fitted).
10 Via Web LT, perform a manual switch of USW for MAIN 1. 11 Confirm that the SDH analyser is error free. 12 Release the manual switch. 13 Confirm switch reversion and error free. 14 Repeat steps 10 to 14 for all main bearers (if fitted) Note: Report any problems to the commisioning group.
224
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Variable Attenuator
STM-1 ANALYZER
STM-1 ANALYZER
STM-1(CMI) OUT STM-1(CMI) IN
STM-1(CMI) IN STM-1(CMI) OUT
SDH Analyzer
SDH Analyzer
PROT
M-1 BSW unit
M-2
PROT
M-1 BSW unit
M-2
SCSU
SCSU
Fig.151 - Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test Set-Up (in case of STM-1 CMI electric signal)
25.7
BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test)
This BER Characteristic is a lab test.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
225
25.7.1
-
MP1550A SDH analyzer or equivalent. Variable RF attenuator
25.7.2
Up fade:
Specification
BER=10-3 or better at RSL = -17dBm See Fig.153
Down fade
25.7.3
-
Test Procedure
IS (In Service) for all units
Provisioning 1 2
Calibrate the RF variable attenuator vs. receiving level. Measure the BER payload (VC4), and confirm that the BER characteristics meet the required specification.
226
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Variable Attenuator
STM-1 ANALYZER
STM-1 ANALYZER
STM-1(CMI) OUT STM-1(CMI) IN
STM-1(CMI) IN STM-1(CMI) OUT
SDH Analyzer
SDH Analyzer
PROT
M-1 BSW unit
M-2
PROT
M-1 BSW unit
M-2
SCSU
SCSU
Fig.152 - BER Test Set-Up Fig.153 shows the Down Fade BER Characteristics
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
227
BER = 10-3 at RSL = -74.5 dBm

10
-3
10
-4
BER
10
-5
Guaranteed curve
10
BER = 10-6 at RSL = -70.5 dBm
Typical curve
- 78
- 76
- 74
- 72
- 70
- 68 dBm
Receive Signal Level a) Down fade BER characteristics of 64 QAM system
10
-3
BER = 10-3 at RSL = -72 dBm
10
-4
Guaranteed curve BER

10
-5
10
-6
BER = 10-3 at RSL = -68 dBm Typical curve

- 76 - 74 - 72 - 70 - 68 - 66 dBm
Receive Signal Level b) Down fade BER characteristics of 128 QAM system
Fig.153 - Down Fade BER Characteristics
228
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
26
SECTION TEST
This chapter provides instruction for section test of TL radio.
26.1
DCC/OW Test
This procedure is to confirm the Data Communication Channel and orderwire transmission.
26.1.1
Web LT
26.1.2
Test Procedure
Test Set up (for example)
A
FLX
B
FLX
I
FLX
J
FLX
FRX-T
FRX-T
FRX-R
FRX-R
FRX-R
FRX-R
Fig.154 - DCC Test Set up 1 2 3 4 Connect the Web LT with the LAN port in front of SV unit at station C (NE "C"). Log-on to NE "H" and verify correct DCC operation (log-on successful). Verify that the failure of any working channels (removal of TX IF IN cable) does not prevent the DCC operation. Verify that the failure of any working channel does not prevent the DCC operation.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
229
5 6 7
Check that the log-on to all the NEs (NE "C" to NE "H") is possible via DCC. Restore all connections and verify correct DCC operation. And confirm the Orderwire communication.
26.2
Wayside Traffic Test
This section covers the test procedures for the Way Side function. These tests are: Way Side Transmission Test Way Side Characteristics Test
26.2.1

RF variable attenuator Error ratio test set for 2 Mbit/s MP1550A SDH Analyser or equivalent
26.2.2
Way Side Transmission Test

IS (In Service) for all units WS Enable (WS1, WS2) for PROT and M1 NE Clock M1 Line sync
Provisioning
1 2
Input the 2.048 Mbit/s signal to the 75 W port of the BSW unit/OPT BSW and confirm that there is no error at the receiving side. This test shall be carried out on both CH of WS1 and WS2. After hardware setting change, In the same way, confirm 120 W input/output port is error free.
26.2.3
Wayside Input Characteristics Test
Test Set Up
1 2 Set up test to comply with Fig.155. Insert the artificial line in the transmit side of the error ratio test equipment.
Procedure
Provisioning Control DMR A IS (In Service) Synchronization Mode Selection Selection for all units Mode 1 "EXT CLK" "Primary/Secondary"
230
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
DMR B 1
Selection Selection
"2 MHz / 2 Mbit/s" "LINE" (radio side) of M1 CH
Confirm that there is no error, when the artificial line length is varied in 0~ 300m. Line Characteristic Line Length 300m ( 0~6 dB characteristics)
BER measuring set
BER measurin g set
2M OUT 2M IN
2M IN 2M OUT
BER measuring set
BER Measuring set
PROT
M-1 BSW unit
M-2
PROT
M-1 BSW unit
M-2
SCSU
SCSU
Fig.155 - Way Side Transmission Test Set-Up (In case that line impedance is 75 )
26.3
System BER Characteristics Test
This procedure is to measure the system BER characteristics.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
231
26.3.1

AP-9455 (or HP 1652A) STM-1 analyzer with recorder or equivalent Optical attenuator (ATT) 15dBm (x 7) in case of OPT INTF
26.3.2

Specification
SESR: a x L/HRDP (L: link length in km) ESR: b x L/HRDP (L: link length in km) (*1): "a" and "b" values are determined by tender specification (*2): Specification shall be met in accordance with ITU-T M.2101 and ITU-R F.1033.
26.3.3
1 2 3 4
Test Procedure
Set up the test as shown in Fig.156 and Fig.157. The measuring data is recorded for a continuous period of 24 hours. Printout the recording SESR/ESR data after completion of measurement. Test results = (Measured S1 and S2 value of ES/SES) / n Check the performance margin between objective value and measured value. Objective value for 24-hour and 7-day measurement are measured.
Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group. Fig.156 shows the System BER Characteristics.
STM-1 Analyzer
STM-1
PROT (GO) M-1 (GO) M-2 (GO)
LOOP BACK
LOOP BACK
PROT (RTN) M-1 (RTN) M-2 (RTN) STM-1

Fig.156 - System BER Characteristics TEST Fig.157 shows the System BER Characteristics Test Set Up.
232
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
STM-1 ANALYZER
PROT
M-1
IN
M-2
IN
PROT
IN
M-1
IN
M-2
IN
SDH Analyzer STM-1(CMI) OUT
IN
STM-1(CMI) IN
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
BSW unit
BSW unit
SCSU
SCSU
Fig.157 - System BER Characteristics Test Set Up
26.4
Synchronization Source Test
The following procedures are designed to test the synchronization source for the TL radio.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
233
26.4.1
Test Procedure - (Source Switching on Mode 1)
Test Set UP
Pattern Detector
CN 5, 6
BSW M-1 TCU 1 TCU 2
T0: 2.048 Mb/s T4: 2.048 Mb/s
BSW M-1
MUX
CN 3, 4
Synthesizer Pattern Generator
EXT CLK
Fig.158 - Switching on Mode 1
Procedure
PD Provisioning TL Service State Synchronization Clock source entry Set Synchronization Optical input side clock entry 234 In Service (for all units) TCU mode Main 1 CH Set Sync. Mode Set Sync. Parameter Priority 2 Pattern Detector (use of error rate test set is preferable)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Radio input side clock entry Synchronization Mode 2MHz -P clock entry MUX Service State Clock source
Priority 3 Mode 1 Priority 1 In Service (for all units) EXT CLK
Source Switching on Mode 1

Automatic Change Over 1 2 On test set up shown in Fig.159, confirm by Web LT that the Priority 1 of EXT CLK is selected as the clock source of the TL. Confirm on the PD that the bit rate of TO MON output is 2.048 Mbit/s. When the EXT CLK is interrupted, confirm by Web LT that the clock source is changed over from the Priority 1 to the Priority 2 of the optical input clock. Confirm on the PD that the bit rate of T0 MON is 2.048 Mbit/s. When the EXT CLK and the optical input clock are interrupted confirm by Web LT that the clock source is changed over to the Priority 3 of radio input clock. Confirm on the PD that the bit rate of T0 MON output is 2.048Mbit/s. When the EXT CLK and the optical input clock and the radio input clock are interrupted, confirm by Web LT that the hold over function of the TCU unit is operated. Confirm that the PD bit rate of T0 MON is 2.048 Mbit/s. Restore the EXT CLK, the optional input clock and the radio input clock, and confirm that Priority 1 of the EXT CLK is selected again.
The change over of item 1 and 2 are summarized as Tab.75. Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
Source Switching on Mode 1

Manual Change Over 1 Select the Priority 2 of optical input clock by Web LT control and confirm by FLEXR that the optical clock is correctly selected as the clock source of the TL. Confirm on the PD that the bit rate of T0 MON is 2.048 Mbit/s. When the clock source of the Priority 2 of optical input clock are interrupted, confirm by Web LT that the clock source is changed over to the Priority 1 of the EXT CLK. Confirm on PD that the bit rate is of the T0 MON is 2.048 Mbit/s. Even if the lost input clock of Priority 2 is restored, confirm that the Priority 1 of EXT CLK is selected as clock source. Confirm on the PD that the bit rate is 2.048 Mbit/s.
Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group. Tab.75 - Mode 1 Confirmation Items of Switching Confirmation items (1), (5) Automatic changeover (2) (3) (4) (1) Manual changeover (2) (3) X = Fault O = Normal Mode 1 clock source Priority 1 O X X X O O O Priority2 O O X X O-C X-C O Priority 3 O O O X O O O To clock source Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Hold over Priority 2 Priority 1 Priority 1
C = Control by FLEXR
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
235
26.4.2
Procedure
Test Procedure - (Switching Test of TCU)
Provisioning
Service State Synchronization Clock source entry Synch. Mode
In Service (for all units) TCU MAIN 1 CH Mode 1
COM NE
Switching Test of TCU

Manual Change Over When the WORK/PROT switching test of the two TCU units are carried out by using the Web LT control function, confirm on the UNIT/RCI/LED indication that the switching between the TCU units are correctly operated. Confirm also that there is no error on STM-1 main signal when this switching is operated. Note: Report any problems to the commissioning group.
Switching Test of TCU

Automatic Change Over 1 2 3 When the No 1 TCU unit operated as WORK is extracted from the SEM shelf, confirm on the UNIT/ RCI LED indication that of 2 TCU unit (PROT) is operated instead of the faulty No 1 TCU unit (WORK). Replace No 1 TCU, confirm that the switching action (from No 2 to No 1) has not occurred. Repeat test procedure for TCU2 to TCU1.
Test Set Up
Fig.159 - Switching Test of TCU Unit 236
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
27
MAJOR FUNCTION OF WEB LT
27.1
Menu Tree
Fig.160 and Tab.76 show the menu tree and menu description of Web LT.
Menu MSTU TCU Condition HK SV
RPS & Loopback Clock Source RCI System & Common HK Control Control Set Date Revise Date Restart Network RPI Equipment Facility & Group Trace Service State RSPI & UC & RPS Provisioning Provisioning Menu RUC & RSC & RPS Received Trace Retrieve Data Physical Inventory Un SSMB OW HK PI NE Network Setting Sync
Condition History Control & Provisioning
DCC Selector Setting AU Setting Password
Current PM Download Performance PM Threshold Analog Monitor Initialize Register
Help
Fig.160 - Menu Tree of Web LT
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
237
Tab.76 Menu
Menu Description Description Condition
All MSTU TCU HK SV
Show all active conditions on the NE Show active conditions on MSTU (s) Show active conditions on TCU (s) Show active conditions including HK digital input ports on HK (s) Show active conditions on the SV Control
RPS & Loopback Clock Source RCI HK Control Set Date Revise Date Restart Network RPI
RPS manual switching/Loopback operation TCU manual switching/Synchronization source manual switching Remote Card Identifier Turn on or off a HK digital output port Set date and time to the real time clock on SV Time adjustment by SNTP Restart network layer program Radio Physical Interface - CW/DADE/Frequency Measurement Provisioning
Provisioning Menu System & Common Sync Equipment & Facility Group Trace Service State RSPI & UC & RPS RUC & RSC & RPS OW HK Description Physical Inventory NE Frequency band/Allocation/Space Diversity/Maximum channel number/RPS use/HK use/TCU protection use/LED colour mode Synchronization mode/Priority/Sync Parameter RF channel assignment/XPIC use/Local oscillator master-slave/B2ERR SF or SD J0 use/Section Trace Equipment/Facility-RS/Facility RSPI/RPS/Maintenance WS/ATPC/Radio Route ID/BER Initiator/UC (F1 Byte)/RPS Initiator Enable RUC/RSC use/RPS maximum channel entry/OCC use/RPS Priority channel OW use/OW Ring Restorer use/Use channel/4W Extension use/Station Number/Buzzer function use Set description to an HK digital input/output port Physical Inventory for NE - System Name/System Contact/System Location/Site Code/Equipment Code/Local Number/Resource Status/ Equipment Note/NE Type IP address/Sub net mask/Default Gateway/SNMP/Time Zone/ Firmware version/MAC address Set DCC applications Set parameters for AU pointer Set password for provisioning
Network Setting DCC Selector Setting AU Setting Password
238
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Retrieve Data Received Trace Physical Inventory Unit SSMB Section Trace monitor - Send/Receive/Expect SIU Type/Hardware Build Status/Software Build Status/Serial Number Monitor SSMB quality value the NE is receiving History Condition Control & Provisioning Show historical conditions on the NE Show operation command history to the NE Performance Current PM Download PM Threshold Analog Monitor Initialize Register Help Show current register of performance monitor Download historical resister of performance monitor SEV/Receive Level-1/Receive Level-2/NSES/Transmit Level Receive Level Main/Receive Level SD/Transmit Level Clear current & Historical PM resister, historical Condition and Control & Provisioning history Download or display online help file. The help file has .pdf format.
27.2
Condition Message
Status such as events and alarms occurring at a NE are reported as a condition. TL reports various events and alarms such as tributary signal condition, auxiliary signal status and installed card conditions. All condition messages supported by TL are shown in Tab.77. Tab.77 - Condition Message Unit AIDTYPE Condition type CARD-FAIL RMV MISMOUNT-CM MISMOUNT-NC RCI FAN-FAIL MOD-FLR ACTCW XPIC-OFF DEM-FLR SNMP Web LT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Condition description Card Failure Unit Is Removed Unit Is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch) Unit Is Mis-mounted (No Configuration Setting) Remote Card Identifier in active condition Fan Failure (One or more fan failure was detected) MOD Block Failure Carrier Wave in Active ConditionModulation is suspended for maintenance XPIC Is Off (For Co-Channel operation system) DEM Block Failure
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
239
TX-FLR
TX Block Failure TX output level out of range or TX local oscillator unlock ALC-OFF in Active Condition ALC (Automatic Level Control) of TX is Off (Manual) = maintenance RX Block Failure DEM input signal lost despite RX signal is alive, or RX local oscillator unlock EPS-OFF in Active Condition (For SD reception) SD-DADE in Active Condition (MSTU is in SD-DADE adjustment mode.) AGC-OFF in Active Condition AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of RX is Off (manual) = maintenance Frequency Measurement ALC, AGC and EPS are OFF for IF-IF measurement RX Local Internal Clock (For co-channel operation system) PS Failure Loss of Signal in MOD Input signal loss to Modulator section from Baseband section Loss of Signal in DEM Input signal loss to Demodulator section from IF section Loss of Frame Frame alignment loss of radio frame. (Demodulator unlock) Unavailable State (RP) Fading Alarm Degradation of received IF spectrum and BER ALM of radio parity occurred. (RP ERR*(RX INI65+NTCH+SLOPE)) Radio Route ID Mismatch Excessive Bit Error Rate RP (Radio Portion) Loss of Signal in TX Input signal loss to TX section from Modulator section. Loss of Signal in RX MN-RCV-DN and SD-RCV-DN occurred SD RX Received Level Down SD RX level is less than -76dBm. (Equivalent to BER=10-3) Main RX Received Level Down Main RX level is less than -76dBm. (Equivalent to BER=10-3)
EQPT
ACTALCOFF
RX-FLR
ACTEPSOFF ACTSDDADE
X X
X X
ACTAGCOFF
FMSR
RXLCLINT PSFAIL MOD-LOS
X X X
X X X
MSTU
DEM-LOS
LOF UAS-RP
X X
X X
RSPI
FADE-ALM
RADRM RP-ER
X X
X X
TX-LOS
RX-LOS
SD-RCV-DN
MN-RCV-DN
240
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
LOS
Loss of Signal Loss of STM1 signal input occurred at STM1RS section Loss of FrameLoss of STM1 frame occurred at STM1RS section. Section Trace ID Mismatch Unavailable State (B1) Alarm Indication Signal Received (MSAIS) Excessive Bit Error Rate (B2) Signal Degrade (B2) Far End Receive Failure Unavailable State (B2) Unavailable State (FEBE) Loopback in Active Condition Loss of Pointer Alarm Indication Signal Received (AUAIS) Loss of Pointer Alarm Indication Signal Received (AUAIS) Loss of Signal Loss of UC (F1 Byte) signal input occurred Loss of Signal Loss of WSS (Way Side in SOH) or WSR (Way Side in RFCOH) signal input occurred Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz) Loss of equipment synchronization clock signal (6.48MHz) from TCU to MSTU occurred Loss of Signal in XPICLoss of IF signal for XPIC occurred Loss of Protection Signal Serial Interface Failure
STM1RS
LOF STIM UAS-B1 AIS B2-ERR B2-SD
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
STM1MS
FERF UAS-B2 UAS-FEBE LOOPBACK LOP
AU4
AIS LOP
AU3#1 ... #3
AIS LOS
UC
WS
LOS
6MCLK-LOS
CNCT
XPIC-LOS PIN-LOS SINT-FAIL
X X X
X X X
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
241
CARD-FAIL LOGS CPU FAIL LOGM APL FAIL LOS OF LINK SUBUNIT-FAIL RCI START-UP EQPT ECU-FAIL ECU-RMVD COMM-FAIL GP1W1-R COMM-FAIL GP1W1-L COMM-FAIL GP2W1-R COMM-FAIL GP2W1-L LOCKOUT-BSW LOCKOUT-USW REQ-BSW SV REQ-USW SWNG-BSW SWNG-USW FRCD-BSW RPS FRCD-USW MAN-BSW MAN-USW TRAFICTOP-BSW TRAFICTOP-USW PRCM
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Card Failure LOG-S CPU (Card controller) Failure (Reserved) Los of HDLC Link between LOG-S and LOG-S CPU Back Up Sub Unit Failure Remote Card Identifier LOG-S is starting up ECU Sub Unit Failure ECU Sub Unit Removed GP1-W1-R DCC communication Failure GP1-W1-L DCC communication Failure GP2-W1-R DCC communication Failure GP2-W1-L DCC communication Failure Lockout of BSW Lockout of USW Bipolar Switch Request Unipolar Switch Request Switching Failure in BSW Switching Failure in USW Forced Switch of BSW Forced Switch of USW Manual Switch of BSW Manual Switch of USW Traffic to Protection by BSW Traffic to Protection by USW Priority Channel Mismatch The equipment will ignore the priority channel setting under the alarm condition Loss of Frame Loss of RSC input signal frame Loss of SignalLoss of RUC input signal Name of external House Keeping alarm item Name of external House Keeping control item Alarm Cut Off is in Active Condition
RSC RUC CONT ENV COM
LOF LOS (Set name) (Set name) ACTACO
X X X X X
X X X X X
242
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
CARD-FAIL RMVD MISMOUNT-CM MISMOUNT-NC RCI EQPT MANSW FRCDSW
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
Card Failure Unit Is Removed Unit Is Mismounted (Configuration Mismatch) Unit Is Mismounted (No Configuration Setting) Remote Card Identifier Manual Switch Manually switchover to redundant TCU Forced Switch Forcedly switchover to redundant TCU Freeze Switch Freeze switching over of TCU card protection TCU Protection Switch Condition (This condition can be retrieved from *** menu via WebLT.) PS Failure Manual Switch Synchronization switch is in manual switching state External Reference Clock output Cut Off Network Reference Clock Quality Down Received SSMB quality value entered in priority is crossed set threshold Holdover State Entered Internal Clock State Entered Selected EC Clock Entry Status (This condition can be retrieved from Control / Clock Source menu via WebLT.) Selected LC Clock Entry Status (This condition can be retrieved from Control / Clock SOurce menu via WebLT Loss of Signal (2 Mb/s) Loss of external 2Mb/s clock signal input occurred Alarm Indication Signal Received AIS received from external 2Mb/s clock signal input Frame Alignment Loss Loss of frame alignment 2Mb/s external clock signal input occurred. Loss of Signal (2 MHz) Loss of 2MHz external clock input signal occurred
FRZSW
WKSWP PSFAIL MANSW EXTCLK-CUTOFF QUALITY-DOWN SYNC HOLDOVER INTERNAL ECSTATUS
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X
TCU
LCSTATUS
LOS-2MB
CLKBIT
AIS
FAL
CLKHZ
LOS-2MH
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
243
CARD-FAIL RMVD EQPT MISMOUNT-CM MISMOUNT-NC HK RCI CONT (Set name)
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
Card Failure Unit Is Removed Unit Is Mismount (Configuration Mismatch) Unit Is Mismount (No Configuration Setting) Remote Card Identifier (Registered House Keeping External Control Name) Digital output port is in active condition (Registered House Keeping Alarm Name) Digital input port is in active condition
ENV
(Set name)
27.3
Performance Monitoring
TL provides performance monitoring based on ITU-T Recommendation. TL stores one (1) current and historical registers for 1-Day periodical performance and one (1) current and ninety five (95) registers for 15Min periodical performance. These values can be retrieved via Web LT and SNMP. All performance monitoring values supported by TL are shown in Tab.78. Tab.78 - Performance Monitoring AIDTYPE MON TYPE SNMP Web LT Condition description Background Block Error at RSPI (Radio Section Physical Interface) section The number of errored block which is detected during the normal operation period except the duration of SES and UAS. 15-min: 0 to 16777215 units 1-day: 0 to 4294967295 units Errored Second at RSPI section The number of second which contains at least one block error during the Available time. 15-min: 0 to 900 seconds 1-day: 0 to 86400seconds Severely Error Second at RSPI section The number of second which contains Errored Blocks (EB) more than Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) during the Available time. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Un-Available Second at RSPI section The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) which is defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF). In case of UAF = 10 sec, a period of UAS starts when Errored Block (EB) in each second exceeds SEV for 10 consecutive seconds, and terminates when EB does not exceed SEV for 10 consecutive seconds. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
BBE
ES
SES
RSPI
UAS
244
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
OFS
Out of Frame Second at RSPI section The number of seconds which contains at least one occasion of synchronization loss of the frame alignment signal. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Background Block Error Ratio at RSPI section 15-MIN: 0E-0 to 1.4E-7 1-DAY: 0E-0 to 1.4E-9 Errored Second Ratio at RSPI section 15-MIN: 0E-0 to 1.1E-3 1-DAY: 0E-0 to 1.2E-5 Severely Errored Second Ratio at RSPI section Background Block Error at STM1RS The number of errored block which is detected during the normal operation period except the duration of SES and UAS. 15-min: 0 to 16777215 units 1-day: 0 to 4294967295 units Errored Second at STM1RS The number of second which contains at least one block error during the Available time. 15-min: 0 to 900 seconds 1-day: 0 to 86400seconds Severely Error Second at STM1RS The number of second which contains Errored Blocks (EB) more than Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) during the Available time. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Un-Available Second at STM1RS The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) which is defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF). In case of UAF = 10 sec, a period of UAS starts when Errored Block (EB) in each second exceeds SEV for 10 consecutive seconds, and terminates when EB does not exceed SEV for 10 consecutive seconds. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Out of Frame Second at STM1RS The number of seconds which contains at least one occasion of synchronization loss of the frame alignment signal. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Background Block Error Ratio at STM1RS 15-MIN: 0E-0 to 1.4E-7 1-DAY: 0E-0 to 1.4E-9 Errored Second Ratio at STM1RS 15-MIN: 0E-0 to 1.1E-3 1-DAY: 0E-0 to 1.2E-5 Severely Errored Second Ratio at STM1RS Background Block Error at STM1MS The number of errored block which is detected during the normal operation period except the duration of SES and UAS. 15-min: 0 to 16777215 units 1-day: 0 to 4294967295 units
BBER
ESR SESR
X X
BBE
ES
SES
UAS
STM1RS
OFS
BBER
ESR SESR
X X
X X
BBE
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
245
ES
Errored Second at STM1MS The number of second which contains at least one block error during the Available time. 15-min: 0 to 900 seconds 1-day: 0 to 86400seconds Severely Error Second at STM1MS The number of second which contains Errored Blocks (EB) more than Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) during the Available time. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Un-Available Second at STM1MS The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) which is defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF). In case of UAF = 10 sec, a period of UAS starts when Errored Block (EB) in each second exceeds SEV for 10 consecutive seconds, and terminates when EB does not exceed SEV for 10 consecutive seconds. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Background Block Error Ratio at STM1MS 15-MIN: 0E-0 to 1.4E-7 1-DAY: 0E-0 to 1.4E-9 Errored Second Ratio at STM1MS 15-MIN: 0E-0 to 1.1E-3 1-DAY: 0E-0 to 1.2E-5 Severely Errored Second Ratio at STM1MS Receive Level of Main Antenna Maximum The maximum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY: -15 to -80 dBm Receive Level of Main Antenna Minimum The minimum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm Receive Level of SD Antenna Maximum The maximum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY: -15 to -80 dBm Receive Level of SD Antenna Maximum The maximum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY: -15 to -80 dBm Transmitted Level Maximum The maximum transmit level during the monitoring period. +11 to +35 dBm Transmitted Level Minimum The minimum transmit level during the monitoring period. +11 to +35 dBm Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified by RL-1 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified by RL-2 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified by RL-1
SES
STM1MS
UAS
BBER
ESR SESR
X X
X X
RL-M-MAX
RL-M-MIN
RL-SD-MAX
RL-SD-MIN
TL-MAX
TL-MIN
EQPT
RLTS-M-1 RLTS-M-2 RLTS-SD-1
X X X
X X X
246
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
RLTS-SD-2
Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified by RL-2 Transmit Level Threshold crossed Seconds 15-MIN: 1 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 1 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Receive Level of Main Antenna The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the Main antenna. -15 to -80 dBm Receive Level of SD (Space Diversity) Antenna The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the SD antenna. -15 to -80 dBm Transmit Level The RF transmit level at the output of MSTU. +11 to +35 dBm Protection Switch Actual Count USW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation (USW). 15-MIN: 0 to 1612800 times 1-DAY: 0 to 154828800 times Protection Switch Request Count USW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including PSAC-U and invalid request due to persistence (USW). 15-MIN: 0 to 1612800 times 1-DAY: 0 to 154828800 times Protection Switch Actual Duration USW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PSAC-U. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration USW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch operation (USW). 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds Protection Switch Actual Count BSW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation (BSW). 15-MIN: 0 to 1612800 times 1-DAY: 0 to 154828800 times Protection Switch Request Count BSW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including PSAC-B and invalid request due to persistence (BSW). 15-MIN: 0 to 1612800 times 1-DAY: 0 to 154828800 times Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PSAC-B. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch operation (BSW). 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds
TLTS
RL-M
RL-SD
TL
PSAC-U
PSRC-U
PSAD-U
PSRSAD-U
RPS
PSAC-B
PSRC-B
PSAD-B
PSRSAD-B
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
247
PJCH
Pointer Justification Count High The number of frame which contains at least one occasion of pointer justification decrement (PJCH). 15-MIN: 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535) 1-DAY: 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215) Pointer Justification Count Low The number of frame which contains at least one occasion of pointer justification increment (PJCL). 15-MIN: 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535) 1-DAY: 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215) Pointer Justification Seconds The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PJCH and/or PJCL. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) Pointer Justification Count High The number of frame which contains at least one occasion of pointer justification decrement (PJCH). 15-MIN: 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535) 1-DAY: 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215) Pointer Justification Count Low The number of frame which contains at least one occasion of pointer justification increment (PJCL). 15-MIN: 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535) 1-DAY: 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215) Pointer Justification Seconds The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PJCH and/or PJCL. 15-MIN: 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY: 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
AU4
PJCL
PJS
PJCH
AU3#1, #3
PJCL
PJS
27.4
Control Command
TL provides many control commands such as carrier wave sending, main signal loop-back and LED blinking on Unit card to attract a notice. These commands are helpful for maintenance and system setup. All control commands provided by TL are shown in Tab.79. Tab.79 - Control Command Unit AIDTYPE EQPT Condition type CW SNMP Web LT X Condition description CW ON Suppress modulation and send carrier wave. DADE Adjustment Operate automatic DADE adjustment function for RPS. Frequency Measurement Operate Frequency Measurement function that set necessary setting for IF-IF measurement to a radio link at once. Remote Card Identifier Operate RCI which attract maintenance staffs attention.
DADEADJUST
MSTU
FMSR
RCI
248
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
STM1 EQPT RPS
LPBK RCI BSW-MAN BSW-FRCD BSW-LOCKOUT
X X X X X X X X X
Loop Back Operate loop back function in baseband section. Remote Card Identifier Manual BSW Operate manual switching of BSW Forced BSW Operate forced switching of BSW Lockout BSW Operate lockout of BSW Manual USW Operate manual switching of USW Forced USW Operate forced switching of USW Lockout USW Operate lockout of USW External Control 0-<1-4> Control HK digital output port Remote Card Identifier Operate RCI which attract maintenance staffs attention Manual Protection Switch Operate manual protection switch of TCU card redundancy Forced Protection Switch Operate forced protection switch of TCU card redundancy Freeze Protection Switch Freeze protection switch of TCU card redundancy Priority1 Operate manual sync switching to Priority1 clock Priority2 Operate manual sync switching to Priority2 clock Priority3 Operate manual sync switching to Priority3 clock Internal Operate manual sync switching to Internal clock Hold Over Operate manual sync switching to Hold Over mode. Remote Card Identifier Operate RCI which attract maintenance staffs attention External Control 1-<1-16>, 2-<1-16> Control HK digital output port.
SV
USW-MAN USW-FRCD USW-LOCKOUT HK EXT-CONT 0-<1-4>
EQPT
RCI
PROTNSW MAN
PROTNSW FRCD
PROTNSW FRZ
TCU
SYNC
PRI1
PRI2
PRI3
INT
HO
EQPT HK HK
RCI EXT-CONT 1-<1-16> EXT-CONT 2-<1-16>
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
249
27.5
Provisioning
TL provides various configuration such as RF frequency band, channels used, auxiliary signal setting and optional cards configuration. Major part of system setting is carried out through the Web LT. All provisioning items for TL system setting are shown in Tab.80. Tab.80 - Provisioning Provisioning KEYWORD RF DOMAIN 4G to 13G SNMP Web LT X X Description RF frequency Band Set RF frequency band to operate an NE. Frequency Arrangement Set Frequency Arrangement of an NE to Alternate or Co-Channel. Space Diversity Enable or disable SD receiver. NE Mode of SOH Access Set SOH access mode of the NE to MS or RS. GP1 Maximum Channel Set maximum channel number of RPS Group1. GP2 Maximum Channel Set maximum channel number of RPS Group2. GP1 RPS Use Enable or disable RPS GP1 protection switching. GP1 RPS Use Enable or disable RPS GP2 protection switching. HK Use Set number of optional HK card in use. TCU Card Protection Use Enable or disable optional TCU card protection switching. Synchronization Mode Set synchronization mode to Mode1 or Mode2. Clock Mode Set equipment clock recovery mode to THROUGH Mode or TCU Mode. EC Priority1 Entry Set EC Priority1 clock source from tributaries.
FREQA
ALT/CO
SD NE MODE
Y/N MS/RS
X X
X X
GP1MXCH
1, 2 to 7
Edit System
GP2MXCH
N, 1 to 7
GP1RPS
Y/N
GP2RPS
N/Y
HK
N, 1, 2
TCUPTC
Y/N
SYNCMODE
1/2
CLKMODE
THROUGH/TCU N/INT CLKHZ-X/Y CLKBIT-X/Y STM-1 Line AID N/INT CLKHZ-X/Y CLKBIT-X/Y STM-1 Line AID INT CLKHZ-X/Y CLKBIT-X/Y STM-1 Line AID
ECPRI1
ECPRI2
EC Priority2 Entry Set EC Priority2 clock source from tributaries.
ECPRI3
EC Priority3 Entry Set EC Priority3 clock source from tributaries.
250
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
LCPRI1 LCPRI2 Edit Synchronization LCPRI3 HZ-CODE-X HZ-CODE-Y BITCODE-X BITCODE-Y PBXECSYNC PBXLCSYNC
N STM-1 Line AID N STM-1 Line AID( N STM-1 Line AID 0 to 15 (def.2) 0 to 15 (def.2) 0 to 15 (def.2) 0 to 15 (def.2) 1/0 1/0
X X X
X X X X X X X X X
LC Priority1 Entry Set LC Priority1 clock source from tributaries. LC Priority2 Entry Set LC Priority2 clock source from tributaries. LC Priority3 Entry Set LC Priority3 clock source from tributaries. External Clock input X (2MHz) assumed Quality value External Clock input Y (2MHz) assumed Quality value External Clock input X (2Mb/s) assumed Quality value External Clock input Y (2Mb/s) assumed Quality value External EC Clock output (2Mb/s) P-bit setting (Odd frame bit5) External LC Clock output (2Mb/s) P-bit setting (Odd frame bit5) EC clock quality level down alarm threshold Set the threshold of EC Clock Quality Down alarm. LC clock quality level down alarm threshold Set the threshold of LC Clock Quality Down alarm. WTR use for automatic synchronization switching by 30 sec err free check Frame detection use for external clock input (2Mb/s) AIS detection use for external clock input (2Mb/s) Set alarm attribute of B2-ERR to SF or SD Set expect trace value on J0 byte Set sending Trace on J0 byte Inhibit Trace ID mismatch alarm Set LED colour mode, Normal = Yellow or Normal = Green Set RF channel Select local oscillator clock for XPIC XPIC use Enable or disable XPIC function. Set AU pointer action to AU4 or AU3. Change equipment status to In Service Change equipment status to Out Of Service
ECQLTYTH
0 to 14
LCQLTYTH
0 to 14
ERRFREE FRAME AIS Edit Facility Group STM1MS ERRATTR EXPTRC Edit Trace STM1RS TRC TRIMINH Edit Common LEDMODE FREQ LOCALCLK Edit Equipment XPIC AUMODE Enter Equipment Delete Equipment
N/Y Y/N Y/N SF/SD 15 ASCII 15 ASCII Y/N MODE1/2 CH1 to CH64 MASTER/SLAVE N/Y AU4/AU3 X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
251
Edit Facility STM1RS
JO
N/STMID/TRC
J0 byte use Set J0 byte usage to not in use, STM-ID or Trace. E1 order wire use Enable or disable OW in E1 byte. E2order wire use Enable or disable OW in E1 byte. Set BER alarm (RP ERR) initiator threshold Set radio portion route ID WS traffic in SOH use Enable or disable WS traffic carried by spare byte in STM1 SOH. WS traffic in RFCOH use Enable or disable WS traffic carried by spare byte in RFCOH. Set ATPC operation mode Set ATPC operation mode to Low power, High power or Automatic operation. Set ATPC initiator Set ATPC initiator threshold at Automatic operation mode to -65dBm, -55dBm or -45dBm Set interface for Digital module of RUC Set transmission channel for RSC UC (F1) use Enable or disable UC traffic carried by F1 byte. Set interface of UC (F1) Set WTR time for RPS in minutes Set priority channel for RPS Set maximum channel for RPS OCC use Enable or disable OCC traffic carried by protection channel. Activate or deactivate RPS initiator Set line side channel to transmit E1 OW Set radio side channel to transmit E1 OW Set line side channel to transmit E2 OW Set radio side channel to transmit E2 OW OW useEnable or disable OW facility E1 OW 4W extension use Enable or disable 4W extension of E1 OW. E2 OW 4W extension use Enable or disable 4W extension of E1 OW. Set E1 OW group address (Upper 2 digits of phone number)
OWE1 Edit Facility STM1MS Edit Facility RSPI OWE2 BER-INI ROUTEID SOHWS
Y/N Y/N 2 to 8 (def.4) 0 to 15 (def.0) N/Y
X X X X X
RFCOHWS
N/Y
TPC
LOW/HIGH/ AUTO
ATPCINI
65, 55, 45 CODIRE/CONTRA N, P, W1 to W7 N/Y CODIRE/CONTRA N, 1 to 20 N, W1 N, 1 to 7 Y/N N/Y N, GPm-Wn N, GPm-Wn N, GPm-Wn N, GPm-Wn N/Y N/Y N/Y 00 to 99
Edit Facility RUC Edit Facility RSC
64KINF DSCSEL CONNLINE
X X X
Edit Facility UC 64KINF WTR PRIOCH MXCH Edit Facility RPS OCC INIENA OWSEL-E1-L OWSEL-E1-R OWSEL-E2-L OWSEL-E2-R OWENA EXTOW1 Edit Facility OW EXTOW2 GADD-E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
252
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
SADD-E1 BZR-E1 GADD-E2 SADD-E2 BZR-E2 OWRESTR Enter STM1RS Delete STM1RS Enter RSPI RMV-RSPI RST-RSPI DLT-RSPI ENT-RPS DLT-RPS RMV-STM1 RST-STM1 SITE-CODE EQPT-CODE ED-PI LOCAL-NO NE-TYPE RESRC-STT EQPT-NOTE SET-ATTR-ENV SET-ATTR-CONT
00 to 99 Y/N 00 to 99 00 to 99 Y/N N/Y X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X
Set E1 OW station address (Lower 2 digits of phone number) Buzzer function use Enable or disable Buzzer function on SV card. Set E1 OW group address (Upper 2 digits of phone number) Set E1 OW station address (Lower 2 digits of phone number) Buzzer function use Enable or disable Buzzer function on SV card. OW ring restorer function use
X X X X X X X X X
Change STM1RS facility state to IS Change STM1RS facility state to OOS Change RSPI facility state to IS Change RSPI state to maintenance Change RSPI state to operation Change RSPI facility state to OOS Change RPS facility state to IS Change RPS facility state to OOS Change STM1MS state to maintenance Change STM1MS state to operation
9 ASCII 5 ASCII 6 ASCII 56 ASCII 8 ASCII 60 ASCII 40 ASCII 10 ASCII
Edit SITE-CODE within 9 ASCII characters. Edit EQPT-CODE within 9 ASCII characters. Edit LOCAL-NO within 9 ASCII characters. Edit NE-TYPE within 9 ASCII characters. Edit RESRC-STT within 9 ASCII characters. Edit EQPT-NOTE within 9 ASCII characters. Set item name of HK digital input port within 40 ASCII characters. Set item name of HK digital output port within 10 ASCII characters.
Note: Retrieve command only can be use for provisioning via SNMP. WebLT must be used for setting and modifying the provisioning.
27.6
LED Indication
Each unit of TL radio has LEDs for local indication of alarm/status summary. The LEDs on each unit will be observed by removing the front cover. Details of alarm/status shall be observed through the Web LT or SNMP. Legend is shown in Tab.81.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
253
Tab.81 - LEGEND LED MODE Mode1 Mode2 Normal=Green, Alarm=Red Normal=Yellow, Alarm=Red LED INDICATION R G Y BL Red Green Yellow Blink
TL has two (2) status, SA (Service Affect) and NSA (Not Service Affect) internally. All conditions are classified either SA or NSA. Some conditions have both status that is changed regarding to the protection condition, and the LED indication on the SV will be affected the status for these conditions. Tab.82 shows the conditions which takes both SA and NSA status, and the terms which status will be taken. Tab.82 - Service Affect Unit AID EQPT Condition Type RMVD LOF UAS-RP MSTU FADE-ALM RSPI RADRM RP-ERR SD-RCV-DN MN-RCV-DN Description SA When the MSTU is installed in a working (main) channel slot and the channel is not switched to protection channel by RPS, the status of the condition takes SA. NSA When the MSTU is installed in the protection channel slot and any channel is not switched to protection channel by RPS, the status of the condition takes NSA.When the MSTU is installed in a working channel, but the traffic of channel is switched to the protection channel by RPS. SA The TCU is in active condition. NSA The TCU is in standby condition.
TCU
EQPT
RMVD
Tab.83 shows the LED indication on Unit and Tab.84 shows the applicable characters. Tab.83 - LED Indication Led Indication Unit AIDTYPE Condition type Led Mode Mode1 Mode2 ALM Unit Y G R Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 G-BL Y-BL Line MISC Y G R R R R R R (off) (off) R R R/G R/Y SA NSA Card Maint out ALM CUT OFF
(NORMAL) CARD-FAIL RMVD
MISMOUNT-CM
254
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
MISMOUNT-NC RCI FAN-FAIL MOD-FLR ACTCW
Mode1 Mode2
G-BL Y-BL R-BL R R R R R G Y G Y R R R R R R G Y R R R G Y G Y G Y G Y G Y R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R (off) (off) R R R R R (off) (off) (off) (off) (off) R R
Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2
XPIC-OFF DEM-FLR TX-FLR MSTU EQPT ACTALCOFF RX-FLR ACTEPSOFF
Mode1 Mode2
Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2
ACTSDDADE
ACTAGCOFF
FMSR
RXLCLINT PSFAIL MOD-LOS DEM-LOS LOF UAS-RP FADE-ALM RSPI RADRM RP-ERR TX-LOS RX-LOS SD-RCV-DN MN-RCV-DN STM1RS LOS LOF
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
255
STIM UAS-B1 MSTU AIS B2-ERR B2-SD STM1MS FERF UAS-B2 UAS-FEBE LOOPBACK LOP AIS LOS LOS 6MCLK-LOS CNCT XPIC-LOS PIN-LOS (Normal) CARD-FAIL LOGS CPU FAIL LOGM CPU FAIL LOS OF LINK DVM SUBUNIT-FAIL EQPT RCI START-UP ECU-FAIL ECU-RMVD COMM-FAIL GP1-W1-R COMM-FAIL GP1-W1-L SV COMM-FAIL GP2-W1-R COMM-FAIL GP2-W1-L RPS LOCKOUT-BSW Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Y G R R R R R R R-BL Y R R R R R R Mode1 Mode2
R R R R R R R R
R R R R R
G Y R R R R R R R Y G R R R R R R R R R
AU4 UC WS
Y R R R R R R
G Y G Y
LOCKOUT-USW REQ-BSW
256
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
REQ-USW SWNG-BSW SWNG-USW FRCD-BSW Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 R R R R G Y G Y G Y G Y
FRCD-USW
MAN-BSW
MAN-USW TRAFICTOP-BSW TRAFICTOP-USW PRCM RSC RUC CONT LOF LOS (Set name)
R R R Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 R Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 G-BL Y-BL R R R R R G Y
R R R G Y R R G Y R (off) (off) R R G Y G Y G Y R/G R/Y
ENV
(Set name)
COM
ACTACO CARD-FAIL RMVD
MISMOUNT-CM
MANSW TCU
EQPT
FRCDSW
FRZSW PSFAIL MISMOUNT-NC RCI
Mode1 Mode2 R Mode1 Mode2 G-BL Y-BL R-BL R R
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
257
MANSW EXTCLK-CUTOFF QUALITY-DOWN HOLDOVER INTERNAL LOS-2MB CLKBIT AIS FAL CLKHZ LOS-2MH CARD-FAIL RMVD
Mode1 Mode2
G Y
SYNC
R R R R R R R R Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 G-BL Y-BL G-BL Y-BL R-BL Mode1 Mode2 Mode1 Mode2 G Y
R R R R R R R R R/G R/Y R R
EQPT
MISMOUNT-CM
HK
MISMOUNT-NC RCI CONT (Set name)
G Y R R
ENV
(Set name)
258
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
APPENDIX-1 Applicable Character

Tab.84 - Applicable Characters ASCII Characters Char (space) ! N.A () # $ % & N.A () ( ) * + N.A (,) . / HEX 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F Char 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N.A (:) N.A (;) N.A (<) = N.A (>) ? HEX 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F Char @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O HEX 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F Char P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ N.A (\) ] ^ _ HEX 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F Char a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o HEX 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F Char p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ N.A (del) HEX 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F
ASCII codes are not shown in this table can not use for setting of TL. The characters shown with N.A are not applicable, since they are assigned to specific use internally.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
259
260
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Section 5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
28
MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPY
28.1
Maintenance Philosophy
During normal operation, SIAE TL microwave radio system requires no intrusive maintenance work by maintenance personnel. The main duties of maintenance & operation are: Keep radio equipment and environment tidy and clean. Observe alarm/status information and record properly. In case of system failure, locate the fault and review it. If any unit fails, replace to a spare unit and recover the system.
28.2
Human Machine Interface
For maintenance & operation interface, the TL provides Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) to extend alarm/status information to external communication equipment below; For details, refer to Chapter 24, Paragraph 24.10, Section 4. ACCEPTANCE TEST. NE Alarm Alarm Cut Off
LED indications on the unit. Front. For details, refer to Chapter 29. LED on SV unit LED on other units
Web LT (Web based Local Craft Terminal) For more details, refer to Chapter 27, Section 4. ACCEPTANCE TEST. Condition message
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
261
Performance Monitoring Control Command Provisioning LED Indication
SNMP Manager (optional Centralized Supervisory/Control System) provided by Contractor to supervise and control for total network system. For details, refer to the documentation from Contractor.
262
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
29
LED INDICATION
The SV (Supervisory) unit of SCSU (Baseband interface, Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit) indicates the summary of alarms/status conditions. The LEDs on SV unit are visible by removing the bonnet cover of initial shelf. Each unit has LEDs for local indication of alarm/status summary. The LEDs on each unit will be observed by removing the bonnet cover. Detailed alarm/status shall be observed by using Web based Local Craft Terminal (Web LT) or SNMP Manager (Centralized SV) provided by Contractor. Alarm indications, to be displayed or not displayed, are also settable by "Alarm Severity of Set Alarm Attribute, Facility, Provisioning" through Web LT. Fig.161 and Tab.85 show LED indications on SV unit and Fig.162 and Tab.86 shows LED indications of other unit.
SV
UNIT LINE MISC ACS/SWDL NORM NE ALM/RCI MAINT CARD OUT ACO CALL E1 CALL E2
LAN 1
LAN 2
2W E1
2W E2
LED TEST ACO BZ EN
Fig.161 - Front View of SV unit
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
263
Tab.85 - LED Indication of SV unit LED indication Group LED Colour Status Solid on Blinking Green (Y) Indication for SV unit Yellow (G) LINE MISC ACS/SWDL NORM NE ALM/RCI Indication for NE MAINT Red Green (Y) Red Green (Y) Red Green (Y) Red Yellow (G) Red CARD OUT Yellow (G) Yellow (G) Green (Y) Green (Y) Solid on Blinking Solid on Solid on Solid on Blinking Solid on Solid on Solid on Blinking Solid on Solid on Solid on Solid on Blinking Blinking Description Unit failure of SV unit Log memory threshold crossed RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit Normal operation of SV unit Configuration mismatch of SV unit SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal Housekeeping alarm (DI) on Provisioning/SWDL data is being writing Mismatch of software version Normal operation of NE CR/MJ/MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in NE Maintenance condition of NE CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than WR CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious than WR Alarm cut off of NE E1 orderwire is being called E2 orderwire is being called
Red UNIT/RCI
ACO Orderwire CALL E1 CALL E2
Note:
Green (Y) = Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1. Yellow (G) = Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.
UNIT/RCI LINE
Fig.162 - LED indication of other unit
264
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.86 - LED Indication of Other Unit LED indication Group LED Colour Red All units UNIT/RCI Green (Y) Yellow (G) All units except HK SV unit Note: LINE Red Green (Y) Yellow (G) Status Solid on Blinking Solid on Blinking Solid on Solid on Solid on Description Unit failure of the unit RCI (Remote Card Identifier) is operated Normal operation of the unit Configuration mismatch of the unit Loss of Main, Synch or other signal Line signal (working side) is normal Provisioning/SWDL (Software Download) is on progress
ACS/SWDL
Green (Y) = Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1. Yellow (G) = Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
265
30
WEB LT
Web LT is a local terminal that is the main human machine interface for operation, maintenance, system setup and tune-up. The TL Web LT is designed as an embedded web server using HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) protocol and HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) document format on an IP (Internet Protocol) network. An operator can manage the TL NE by accessing with ordinary web browser client software. Tab.87 shows outline of TL Web LT major function Tab.87 - TL Web LT Major Functions Provisioning Sets the system configurations, usage of SOH (Section Overhead) facilities and optional functions, and NE parameters. Displays alarms and conditions. Controls RPS (Radio Protection Switching) and maintenance functions. Displays performance monitors and analog monitors
Status Control Performance Monitor
System
To use the TL Web LT, the PC hardware and software should meet or exceed the requirements listed in Tab.88. Tab.88 - System Requirements Client Requirements HTTP/1.0 or later JavaTM script
a
Cascade Style Sheet (CSS2) Least one working Ethernet port supporting 10/100Base-T 1024x769 XGA Display or higher Recommended Browser Microsoft Internet Explorerb, Ver- (For factory test environsion 6.0 or later ment)
a. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., and refer to Sun's Java programming language. b. Microsoft Internet Explorer is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United State and/or other countries.
Connection
Connect your PC to a LAN port on the SV (Supervisory) card (unit) in SCSU (Supervisory, Control,& Switching Unit) shelf of the target NE (Network Element). Normally, crossover cable should be used for the connection, if you want to connect the PC to the NE directly. The SV card (unit) supports both 10Base-T and 100Base-T Ethernet connection. It is recommended to use CAT5 (Category 5) UTP (Un-shielded Twisted Pair) crossover cable for the connection. There are two Ethernet ports on the SV card (unit), and they are connected to a HUB internally. Therefore, you can use whichever you like better. Fig.163 shows an example of the connection between the PC and the NE.
266
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
SV
UNIT LINE MISC ACS/SWDL NORM NE ALM/RCI MAINT CARD OUT ACO CALL E1 CALL E2
LAN 1
LAN 2
CAT5 UTP Crossover cable for connection
2W E1
2W E2
LED TEST ACO BZ EN
Web LT
Fig.163 - Connection between PC and NE showing LAN Ports On the SV Card (Unit)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
267
31
UNIT REPLACEMENT
Warning
Most of unit replacement operations affect on the traffic transmission service. The maintenance staff must inform these operations to the Central Maintenance & Operation Centre (CMOC) in advance.
31.1
Fan Replacement
An MSTU is equipped with 4 air cooling fans. These fans should be replaced with spares when they are worn out. Tab.89 shows the relationship of FAN alarm and equipment condition. When FAN alarm is detected, all of 4 fans should be replaced with spares at once as soon as possible. Tab.89 - FAN Alarm and Equipment Condition Number of Fan Working 4 3 2 1 Out 0 1 2 3 Alarm No alarm FAN alarm FAN alarm UNIT Failure Equipment Condition of MSTU Normal operation Normal operation TX output power is +22 dBm (LOW) Power supply off to MSTU.BSW operates
How to replace FANs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Turn the rotary switch on MSTU to [F] to switch TX output to LOW level and inhibit "Fan alarm". See Fig.164. Pull out the FAN PWR cable. Remove the FAN assembly. See Fig.164. Mount a new FAN assembly and re-connect the FAN PWR cable securely. Turn back the rotary switch on MSTU to [0] Check alarm/status indications on LEDs and FLEXR. If normal, switch back the traffic from the protection channel.
268
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Turn to [ F ] to switch TX output to LOW level and inhibit Fan alarm

The FAN assembly is mounted onto the MSTU by 4 long screws (1) to (4) 4 short screws (5) to (8). Fig.164 - Replacement of FAN assembly
31.2
MSTU
MSTU and Other Units
To replace an MSTU, the traffic should be switched over to the protection channel by Force operation of BSW/OPT BSW in advance and power supply to the unit should be turned off. BSW/OPT BSW operation interrupts the traffic momentarily.
BSW/OPT BSW
The traffic cannot be protected during the replacement work. The maintenance staff must organize carefully how to replace the unit to minimize the duration of traffic disconnection.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
269
Units in SCSU
Replacement of any unit other than listed below may affect on the traffic seriously: TCU in stand-by (in case of card protection of TCU-X/Y). HK unit.
System Setting Data

System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU. When a unit is replaced with spares, the system setting data will be transferred from the SV unit automatically. There is no setting change after unit replacement. After unit replacement: Turn on power supply and wait at least 10 minutes to complete the system setting data download. Check LED indication on TL equipment. Check Alarm/status indication of Status/Control menu on Web LT. Check Analog Monitoring of Status/Control menu on Web LT. Check the applicable system setting of Provisioning menu on Web LT. Check that Service State is In Service of Provisioning menu on Web LT. Leave equipment for stability check at least 30 minutes. Check Error Performance history by Display PM of Status/Control menu on Web LT. Compare the above data with other channels. Minimize setting change and re-adjustment of the replaced unit unless performance does not meet the long term specification. If setting change and re-adjustment required, follow the instructions of Part IV "Acceptance and Turn up" of this manual.
31.3
SV unit Replacement
System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU. The data is stored in the Inner Memory on the main PCB and in the Back-up Memory on the sub-unit as well. To replace the SV unit with a spare: Check the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch operation). Change the Service State of RPS from In Service (IS) to Out of Service (OOS). Provisioning Service State Change RPS State Group 1 or Group 2 Delete
Log off the Web LT from the NE. Wait until when BACK UP LED of SV unit turns off (approx. 4 minutes) Turn off power supply to the SCSU and remove the SV unit. Remove the Back-up Memory sub-unit form the SV main PCB. Fit the Back-up Memory sub-unit on to the spare SV. Mount the spare SV on to the SCSU and turn on power supply to the SCSU.
270
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Wait until when ACS/SWDL Log on Web LT to the NE.
LED of SV unit turns off (approx. 5 minutes)
Check LED indications TL equipment and Alarm/status conditions on Web LT. Change the Service State of RPS from Out of Service (OOS) to In Service (IS). Provisioning Service State Change RPS State Group 1 or Group 2 Enter
Check the RPS operations. If traffic interruption is not allowed, check Manual operation of USW. If the failure of SV unit extended to the RPS total operation, you must check all functions related.
Fig.165 shows the PCB of SV unit.
WARNING
Do not turn off power supply to the SCSU unit when BACK UP LED is staying on, otherwise the system setting data may be destroyed seriously.
VF/DGTL sub -unit
VF/DGTL sub -unit
Screw
Front side
Backup Memory
Connector side
Screw
Fig.165 - PCB of SV unit
Caution
This unit contains that may be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Observe all precautions relating to the safe handling of ESD sensitive equipment.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
271
31.4
Returning Replaced Unit
Units for TL equipment are manufactured based on high density assembling and require special tools, jigs and measurement equipment for repair. Faulty unit should be returned to the manufacturer for repair. For quick and adequate repair work, following information is essential to be attached to the unit. Unit name Serial No. Station name Facing station name Frequency band Channel No. System configuration Date and time alarm/abnormality detected Date and time the unit replaced Detailed description of alarm/abnormality Alarm/status log of the local station and associated stations Error performance log of the local station and associated stations Detailed description after unit replacement
The user can use its own report format. Tab.90 shows an example of "Faulty Unit Report".
272
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.90 - Faulty unit report (example) Faulty unit report Unit Name Station Name Freq. Band System Configuration No of main CHs BB Interface SE INTF OPT INTF with MSP OPT INTF w/o MSP PE INTF If you are returning an MSTU, please fill the below: Tx output level (specification) = Modulation Sys = 64QAM dBm, 128QAM SD = Yes No Prot CH Operation Sys Yes Alternated Co-channel with Stand-by without Stand-by No Serial No. Facing Station CH No (Tx Freq.)
TCU
Date/Time alarm detected (mm/dd/yy - hh:mm) Date/time unit replaced (mm/dd/yy - hh:mm) Details of alarm/status and other conditions of before unit replacement
Details of alarm/status and other conditions of after unit replacement
Other comments of any
Compiled by Checked by Approved by
Date (mm/dd/yy) Date (mm/dd/yy) Date (mm/dd/yy)
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
273
274
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Section 6. APPENDIX
32
ABBREVIATION OF TL TERMS
Tab.91 - Abbreviation of TL Terms Abbreviation A A/D ACO ACTAGC ACTALS ACTCW ADD ADM AGC AID AIS AIS REC ALC ALM ALSMAN ALSTST AMP ANS ANT Analog to Digital converter Alarm Cut Off Act Automatic Gain Control of Receiver Act Automatic Laser Shut down Act Carrier Wave mode Address Add Drop Multiplexer Automatic Gain Control Access Identification Alarm Indication Signal Alarm Indication Signal Receiving Automatic Level Control Alarm Automatic Laser Shut down released by Manual restart Automatic Laser Shut down released by Test restart Amplifier Answer Antenna Description
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
275
APS ASCII ATPC ATT AU 4 AUD NE ALM
Automatic Protection Switch American Standard Cord for Information Interchange Automatic Transmitter Power Control Attenuator Administrative Unit 4 Audible Network Element Alarm B
B/S BAL BB BBC BBE BBIU BEF BER BIP BPF BR NTWK BRU BSI BSW BWB
Bit per Second Balance Base Band signal Base Band Control Background Block Error Base Band Interface Unit Band Eliminate Filter Bit Error Ratio Bit Interleave Parity check Band Pass Filter Radio Branching Network(Radio frequency band) Radio Branching Network Unit Bit Sequence Independence Bipolar Switch Back-Wired Board C
C/I CIR CK CLK CMB CMI CN CNCT CODIRE CONTRA CPU CR CSESP
Carrier to Interface ratio Circulator Clock Clock Channel management Bus Code Mark Inversion Connector Connect Co-directional interface Contra-directional interface Central Processor Unit Critical Alarm Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Occurred D
D/A
Digital to Analog converter
276
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
DADE DCC DEF DEM DI DMM DO DSC DTMF DUP
Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer Digital Communication Channel Decision Feedback Demodulator Data Input Digital Multi-Meter Data Output Digital Service Channel Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Duplexer E
EC ECU EOW EPS EQL ES ESD ETSI
Equipment Clock Embedded Channel Unit/ Embedded Communication Unit/ Engineering Order Wire Endless Phase Shifter Equalizer Errored Second Electrostatic Discharge European Telecommunication Standard Institute F
F LOSS FEBE FEC FEFR FESP FET FG FIL FLR FMSR FRCDSW
Frame Loss Far End Block Error Forward Error Correction Far End Receive Failure Fifteen minute Error Seconds Performance Field Effect Transistor Frame Ground Filter Failure Frequency Measurement Switch is in Forced Switching mode G
G GaAs GNE GUI GP1 GP2
Ground Gallium Arsenide Gateway Network Element Graphical User Interface Group 1 Group 2
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
277
H H HDB3 HEMT HK HL HL CPU HPA HYB Horizonta High Density Bipolar 3 High Electron Mobility Transistor Housekeeping Higher Layer Higher Layer Central Processor Unit High Power Amplifier Hybrid circuit I ICH ID IEC IF INI INTF IS ITU In-phase Channel Identification International Electrotechnical Commission Intermediate Frequency Initiator Interface In Service International Telecommunication Union L LAPD LBOL LC L6G L7G L8G LED LL CPU LNA LO LO MON LOF LOP LOS LPF LSI LTE LVL Link Application Procedure D channel Laser Bias current is too High Line Clock Lower 6 GHz band Lower 7 GHz band Lower 8 GHz band Light Emitting Diode Lower Layer Central Processor Unit Low Noise Amplifier Local Oscillator Local Oscillator Monitor Loss Of Frame Loss Of Pointer Loss Of Signal Low Pass Filter Large Scale Integrated circuit Line Terminal Equipment Level M
278
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
MAINT MAN SW MC MID MISC MIX MJ MLCM MN MN ANT MOD MPU MS MSP MSTU MUX
Maintenance Manual Switch Maintenance Center Minimum Dispersion combiner Miscellaneous Mixer Major alarm Multi Level Code Modulation Minor alarm Main Antenna Modulator Micro-Processor Unit Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Protection Main Signal Transmission Unit Multiplexer N
NA NC NE NEND NFB NLP NMS NORM NSA NWC
Not Applicable Not Connection Network Element Near END No Fuse Breaker Network Layer Protocol Network Management System Normal Non Service Affect Network Center O
OCC OFS OOS OP AMP OPD OPOR OPT OS OSC OSI
Occasional Traffic Out of Frame Second Out Of Service Operational Amplifier Degradation in Optical Power transmitted Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range Optical Operation Software Oscillator Open Systems Interconnection
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
279
OSSI OW TEL
Operation Support System Interface Orderwire Telephone P
PC PCB PCM PDH PI PJCH PJCL PJCS PLL PLO PM PM DATA PPM PSC PSFAIL PVC PWR
Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board Pulse Code Multiplex Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Photo coupler Interface Pointer Justification Count High Pointer Justification Count Low Pointer Justification Count SEcond Phase Lock Loop Phase Lock Loop controlled Oscillator Performance Monitor Performance Monitor Dat Percent Per Million Protection Switching Second Power Supply Failure Permanent Virtual Circuit Power Q
QAM QCH
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quadrature Channel R
R CLK RAB RADRM RAM RCI RCK RCLK RAI RCI RCV RD RDP RF RFCOH
Receive Clock Rack Alarm Bus Radio Route ID Mismatch Random Access Memory Remote Card Identification Receive Clock Receive Clock Remote Alarm Indication Remote Card Identifier Receive Receive Data Receiver Data Processing Radio Frequency Radio Frame Complementary Over Head byte
280
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
RL RL-1 RL-2 RL-M RL-SD RLTS RMVD RPS RRF RS RSL RST RUC RX RX-LOS RXLCINT
Relay Receiving Level-1 Receiving Level-2 Receiving Level of Main receiver Receiving Level of SD receiver Received Level Threshold Second Required unit is missing Radio Protection Switching Receiver Radio Frequency section Regenerative Section Receive Signal Level Reset Radio Service Channel Receiver Loss of Signal in RX RX Local Internal Clock S
S CLK SA SC SCSU SD SD-RCV-DN SDH SEMF SES SEV SG SIU SLP EQL SR SS BIT SSMB SSU STD STM-1 SUE-RP SV
Send Clock Service Affect Service Channel Switching Control, Supervision Unit Space Diversity SD Receiver Down Synchronous Digital hierarchy Synchronous Equipment Management Function Severely Errored Second Severely Errored Threshold Signal Ground Slide In Unit Slope Equalizer Shift Register Synchronous State Bit Synchronous State Message Byte Synchronous Source Unit Standard Synchronous Transfer Module level 1 Unavailable State Entered (RP) Supervision/Supervisory
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
281
SVC SW SWDL SWTOHO SWTOINT SYNC SYNSW
Switched Virtual Circuit Switch Software Down Load Synchronization reference is in Holdover state Internal source signal is used for Synchronization Synchronization Synchronization Switch T
TARP TCA-OFS TCA-RLTS TCA-RP TCA-TLTS TCK TCLK TCU TD TD N TD P TDP TEL TESP TID TIF TL TL 1 TLTS TRF TVE TX TX-FLR
TID Address Resolution Protocol Threshold Crossing AlertThreshold Crossing Alert- RX Level Threshold Threshold Crossing AlertThreshold Crossing Alert-TX Level Threshold Transmit Clock Transmit Clock Timing Control Unit Transmit Data Transmit Data Negative Transmit Data Positive Transmitter Data Processing Telephone Twenty four Hour Error Seconds Target Identification Transmitter IF section Transmitter output Level Transaction Language 1 Transmitted output Level Threshold Second Transmitter RF section Transversal Equalizer Transmitter Transmitter Failure U
U6G U8G UAS UC UCH UL
Upper 6 GHz Upper 8 GHz Un-available Second/ Un-available State User's service Channel User's service Channel User Level Layer
282
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
USW UAF
Unipolar Switch Un-Availability Filter V
VCO VF VIS NE ALM
Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voice Frequency Visual Network Element Alarm W
WKSWP WR WS WTR
Working unit Switched to Protection Warning Wayside Signal Wait To Restore X
XPIC
Cross Polarization Interference Canceller
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
283
284
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Section 7. LISTS AND SERVICES
33
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Linear Configuration ............................................................................................ 11 Fig.2 - Media Diversity Configuration................................................................................ 11 Fig.3 - Standard Ring Configuration ................................................................................. 11 Fig.4 - TL Radio for N+1, Single-feed Operation ................................................................ 12 Fig.5 - TL Radio for N+1, Alternated Operation .................................................................. 13 Fig.6 - TL Radio for up to 2x(3+1), Co-Channel Operation .................................................. 14 Fig.7 - TL Radio for up to 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation .................................................. 15 Fig.8 - TL Radio for up to 3+1, Double Terminal Operation.................................................. 16 Fig.9 - TL Radio for N+1, Single-feed Operation ................................................................ 30 Fig.10 - TL Radio for N+1, Alternated Operation ................................................................ 31 Fig.11 - TL Radio for 2x(3+1), Co-Channel Operation ......................................................... 32 Fig.12 - TL Radio for 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation ......................................................... 33 Fig.13 - TL Radio for 3+1, Double Terminal Operation ........................................................ 34 Fig.14 - Shelf Layout of N+1, Single-feed Operation........................................................... 36 Fig.15 - Shelf Layout of N+1, Alternated Operation ............................................................ 37 Fig.16 - Shelf Layout of 2x(3+1), Co-Channel Operation..................................................... 38 Fig.17 - Shelf Layout of 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation - (Initial shelf)................................ 39 Fig.18 - Shelf Layout of 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation - (Expansion shelf) ......................... 40 Fig.19 - Shelf Layout of 3+1, Double Terminal Operation - (Initial shelf) ............................... 41 Fig.20 - Temperature and humidity.................................................................................. 42 Fig.21 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F.382-7) ........................................ 54 Fig.22 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 635-6 Annex-1) ............................. 55 Fig.23 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099-3 Annex-1) ................................... 56
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
285
Fig.24 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 383-7) ........................................ 57 Fig.25 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 384-8)........................................ 58 Fig.26 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-8 Annex-1) .................................. 59 Fig.27 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 385-8)........................................ 60 Fig.28 - L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4) ............................................... 61 Fig.29 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 387-9) ........................................ 63 Fig.30 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F. 387-9 Annex-2) ........................... 65 Fig.31 - 3 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R Rec. F.497-7)........................................... 66 Fig.32 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation (Main Antenna Part) ........................................................................ 68 Fig.33 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation (Space Diversity Antenna Part) ......................................................... 69 Fig.34 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation (Main Antenna Part).......................................................................... 70 Fig.35 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation (Main Antenna Part).......................................................................... 71 Fig.36 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-ChannelOperation (Main Antenna Part)................................................................................................ 72 Fig.37 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation (Main Antenna Part)............................................................................................. 73 Fig.38 - Functional Block Diagram for STM-1 electrical interface........................................... 79 Fig.39 - Functional Block Diagram for STM-1 optical interface without MSP............................ 80 Fig.40 - Functional Block Diagram for the unit mixture of STM-1 electrical/optical interface ..... 81 Fig.41 - Main signal flow of STM-1 Electrical Interface Terminal ........................................... 85 Fig.42 - Diagram of Space Diversity Reception .................................................................. 86 Fig.43 - Front Panel of MSTU unit .................................................................................... 88 Fig.44 - Upper View of MSTU adapter ............................................................................... 89 Fig.45 - Signal flow of orderwire...................................................................................... 90 Fig.46 - Signal flow of user channel (F1)........................................................................... 91 Fig.47 - Signal flow of radio user channel ......................................................................... 91 Fig.48 - Signal flow of wayside traffic ............................................................................... 92 Fig.49 - SDH radio overhead bit access ............................................................................ 93 Fig.50 - STM-1 Frame Format Construction ....................................................................... 94 Fig.51 - Radio Frame Structure of 64QAM System.............................................................. 97 Fig.52 - Word Structure of 64QAM System........................................................................ 98 Fig.53 - Radio Frame Structure of 128QAM System ............................................................ 99 Fig.54 - Word Structure of 128QAM System .................................................................... 100 Fig.55 - Radio protection system ................................................................................... 101 Fig.56 - Switching section............................................................................................. 102 Fig.57 - Automatic operation of USW ............................................................................. 103 Fig.58 - Automatic operation of BSW.............................................................................. 104 Fig.59 - Schematic block diagram of SCSU function.......................................................... 108 Fig.60 - Front View of SV Unit ....................................................................................... 110 Fig.61 - Schematic DCC termination by SV and ECU......................................................... 112 Fig.62 - Housekeeping in/out (DI/DO) interface............................................................... 114
286
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Fig.63 - Functional diagram of XPIC ............................................................................... 116 Fig.64 - Cross cable connection of MSTUs for co-channel operation .................................... 116 Fig.65 - Diagram of synchronization Mode 1.................................................................... 118 Fig.66 - Diagram of synchronization Mode 2 (under development as of December 2005) ..................................................................... 118 Fig.67 - Clock mode of TCU .......................................................................................... 119 Fig.68 - Example of line clock selection .......................................................................... 120 Fig.69 - Ring protection................................................................................................ 121 Fig.70 - Electrostatic Discharge Warning Labels ............................................................... 124 Fig.71 - Laser Warning Labels ....................................................................................... 126 Fig.72 - Protective Cap (SC/PC Connector) ..................................................................... 127 Fig.73 - Optical Cable Pulling ........................................................................................ 127 Fig.74 - Optical Cable Bending and Obstruction Limits ...................................................... 127 Fig.75 - Optical Cable Minimum Bending Radius .............................................................. 128 Fig.76 - Optical Cable Twist Limits ................................................................................. 128 Fig.77 - Optical Cable Vibration and Shock Damage ......................................................... 128 Fig.78 - Connector End-face ......................................................................................... 131 Fig.79 - Chip Defects ................................................................................................... 132 Fig.80 - Crack Defects.................................................................................................. 132 Fig.81 - Dimension of ETSI Standard Rack Installation ..................................................... 136 Fig.82 - Initial Shelf and MSTU Unit ............................................................................... 137 Fig.83 - Remove the bonnet cover ................................................................................. 138 Fig.84 - Remove MSTU adapter ..................................................................................... 138 Fig.85 - Remove 2 fittings ............................................................................................ 138 Fig.86 - Install MSTU adapter and slide in rails ................................................................ 139 Fig.87 - Mounting of shelves - 1st ........................................................................................................ Fig.88 - Mounting of shelves - 2nd .......................................................................................................
139 140
Fig.89 - Mounting of slide in units .................................................................................. 140 Fig.90 - Installing an MSTU........................................................................................... 141 Fig.91 - RF branching network unit ................................................................................ 141 Fig.92 - Warning Labels ............................................................................................... 142 Fig.93 - Antenna port location on top of Initial Shelf (Waveguide spacing = 110 mm each) ............................................................................. 143 Fig.94 - Antenna port location on top of the initial shelf .................................................... 143 Fig.95 - An example of Feeder Connection for Alternated Operation ................................... 144 Fig.96 - Twisting Wave guides....................................................................................... 145 Fig.97 - DC power connection to the UIA block ................................................................ 146 Fig.98 - Cable Sheath .................................................................................................. 147 Fig.99 - Method of Crimping ......................................................................................... 148 Fig.100 - AMP hand Crimping Tool ................................................................................. 149 Fig.101 - AMP hand Crimping Method............................................................................. 149 Fig.102 - Good position for satisfactory crimping ............................................................. 150 Fig.103 - Frame Ground of the Equipment Rack............................................................... 151 Fig.104 - MSTU plug-in Adapter and semi rigid coaxial cable connector............................... 152
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
287
Fig.105 - RF Branching Network Filter connection to the shelf (Example for 3+1, Alternated Operation)......................................................................... 153 Fig.106 - STM-1 Electrical Interface Connection ............................................................... 154 Fig.107 - STM-1 optical signal Interface.......................................................................... 155 Fig.108 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection........................................................... 156 Fig.109 - Multi-pin connectors layout of Initial Shelf ......................................................... 157 Fig.110 - Multi-pin connectors layout of Expansion Shelf................................................... 158 Fig.111 - HK1 connector............................................................................................... 160 Fig.112 - HK2 connector............................................................................................... 161 Fig.113 - HK3 connector............................................................................................... 162 Fig.114 - HK4 connector............................................................................................... 163 Fig.115 - HK5 connector............................................................................................... 164 Fig.116 - RUC connector .............................................................................................. 165 Fig.117 - RAB connector............................................................................................... 166 Fig.118 - EOW connector.............................................................................................. 167 Fig.119 - WS/UC connector........................................................................................... 169 Fig.120 - UC connector ................................................................................................ 170 Fig.121 - Laser Warning Labels ..................................................................................... 175 Fig.122 - ESD Warning Labels ....................................................................................... 176 Fig.123 - Inserting a Slide-in Unit .................................................................................. 177 Fig.124 - Removing a Slide-in Unit................................................................................. 177 Fig.125 - Detail of an Extractor Lever............................................................................. 178 Fig.126 - Removing an Optical Unit (OPT BSW/OPT OCC).................................................. 178 Fig.127 - Scope of On-site Acceptance Tests ................................................................... 180 Fig.128 - Return Loss Measurement ............................................................................... 182 Fig.129 - CN34 connector of UIA block ........................................................................... 184 Fig.130 - TX Local Frequency Measurement .................................................................... 186 Fig.131 - TX Output Power Measurement........................................................................ 192 Fig.132 - Transmitter Output Spectrum .......................................................................... 194 Fig.133 - Set-up of Transmit Spectrum Measurement ....................................................... 195 Fig.134 - Set-up of AGC Range Measurement.................................................................. 197 Fig.135 - Optical Output Power Measurement .................................................................. 198 Fig.136 - Optical Receive Levels Test Set Up ................................................................... 200 Fig.137 - External Clock Frequency Measurement ............................................................ 201 Fig.138 - Rack Alarm Bus Test Set-Up............................................................................ 202 Fig.139 - Front Panel of MSTU unit ................................................................................ 204 Fig.140 - TCU setting ................................................................................................... 209 Fig.141 - BSW unit ...................................................................................................... 210 Fig.142 - OPT BSW Setting ........................................................................................... 211 Fig.143 - Receiver Input Power measurement ................................................................. 212 Fig.144 - Received Signal Level (RSL) Calculation Sheet ................................................... 214 Fig.145 - Amplitude and Delay Characteristics................................................................. 216 Fig.146 - Set-up for IF to IF TEST.................................................................................. 217
288
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Fig.147 - ATPC Test Set-Up .......................................................................................... 220 Fig.148 - XPIC DADE set-up.......................................................................................... 221 Fig.149 - IF switcher.................................................................................................... 222 Fig.150 - 3 cases of Delay Difference ............................................................................. 223 Fig.151 - Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test Set-Up (in case of STM-1 CMI electric signal)........................................................................... 225 Fig.152 - BER Test Set-Up ............................................................................................ 227 Fig.153 - Down Fade BER Characteristics........................................................................ 228 Fig.154 - DCC Test Set up ............................................................................................ 229 Fig.155 - Way Side Transmission Test Set-Up (In case that line impedance is 75 ) .............................................................................. 231 Fig.156 - System BER Characteristics TEST..................................................................... 232 Fig.157 - System BER Characteristics Test Set Up............................................................ 233 Fig.158 - Switching on Mode 1 ...................................................................................... 234 Fig.159 - Switching Test of TCU Unit .............................................................................. 236 Fig.160 - Menu Tree of Web LT ..................................................................................... 237 Fig.161 - Front View of SV unit...................................................................................... 263 Fig.162 - LED indication of other unit ............................................................................. 264 Fig.163 - Connection between PC and NE showing LAN Ports On the SV Card (Unit)................................................................................................... 267 Fig.164 - Replacement of FAN assembly ......................................................................... 269 Fig.165 - PCB of SV unit ............................................................................................... 271
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
289
290
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
34
LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - General Specifications..........................................................................................18 Tab.2 - Transmitter section..............................................................................................19 Tab.3 - Receiver section ..................................................................................................20 Tab.4 - Modulation .........................................................................................................21 Tab.5 - Demodulation .....................................................................................................21 Tab.6 - Digital Processing ................................................................................................22 Tab.7 - Overall...............................................................................................................23 Tab.8 - RF Interference ...................................................................................................24 Tab.9 - Countermeasures to Fading ..................................................................................24 Tab.10 - Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface (OPT RSW unit)...........................................25 Tab.11 - Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface (BSW unit) ..............................................26 Tab.12 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (RUC) ..........................................................................28 Tab.13 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (WS)............................................................................28 Tab.14 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (OW) ...........................................................................28 Tab.15 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (User Channel) ..............................................................29 Tab.16 - Power Consumption of each unit ..........................................................................44 Tab.17 - Power Consumption for N+1, Single-feed/Alternated Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 electrical interface ..................................................................................45 Tab.18 - Power Consumption for N+1, Single-feed/Alternated Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 electrical interface ..................................................................................45 Tab.19 - Power Consumption for 2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 electrical interface ..................................................................................46 Tab.20 - Power Consumption for 2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 electrical interface .................................................................................46 Tab.21 - Power Consumption for N+1, Single-feed/Alternated Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 optical interface .....................................................................................47 Tab.22 - Power Consumption for N+1, Single-feed/Alternated Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 optical interface .....................................................................................47 Tab.23 - Power Consumption for 2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 optical interface .....................................................................................48 Tab.24 - Power Consumption for 2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 optical interface .....................................................................................48 Tab.25 - Power Consumption for 3+1, Double Terminal Operation +32 dBm, STM-1 optical interface .....................................................................................49 Tab.26 - Power Consumption for 3+1, Double Terminal Operation +29 dBm, STM-1 optical interface .....................................................................................49 Tab.27 - ITU-R Recommendations ....................................................................................50 Tab.28 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel ............................................................................87 Tab.29 - Main Function of Section Overhead (ITU-T G.707).................................................................................................................95 Tab.30 - Priority Order of RPS Operation ......................................................................... 104
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
291
Tab.31 - Priority Order of Automatic Protection Switching .................................................. 105 Tab.32 - BER ALM Initiation Setting and Time to Initiate/Restore ........................................ 105 Tab.33 - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (1/3) ........................................................ 111 Tab.34 - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (2/3) ........................................................ 111 Tab.35 - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (3/3) ........................................................ 112 Tab.36 - S1 byte code and Quality level .......................................................................... 119 Tab.37 - Connectors on the BWB of SCSU........................................................................ 158 Tab.38 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1 - 1st part ....................................................... 159 Tab.39 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1 - 2nd part ...................................................... 159 Tab.40 - Connector PIN assignment for HK2 - 1st part ....................................................... 160 Tab.41 - Connector PIN assignment for HK2 - 2nd part ...................................................... 160 Tab.42 - Connector PIN assignment for HK3 - 1st part ....................................................... 161 Tab.43 - Connector PIN assignment for HK3 - 2nd part ...................................................... 161 Tab.44 - Connector PIN assignment for HK4 - 1st part ....................................................... 162 Tab.45 - Connector PIN assignment for HK4 - 2nd part ...................................................... 162 Tab.46 - Connector PIN assignment for HK5 - 1st part ....................................................... 163 Tab.47 - Connector PIN assignment for HK5 - 2nd part ...................................................... 163 Tab.48 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC - 1st part ....................................................... 164 Tab.49 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC - 2nd part ...................................................... 165 Tab.50 - Connector PIN assignment for PAB..................................................................... 165 Tab.51 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB .................................................................... 165 Tab.52 - Connector PIN assignment for PAB..................................................................... 167 Tab.53 - Connector PIN assignment for EOW.................................................................... 167 Tab.54 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC - 1st part ................................................... 168 Tab.55 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC - 2nd part .................................................. 168 Tab.56 - Connector PIN assignment for UC - 1st part......................................................... 169 Tab.57 - Connector PIN assignment for UC - 2nd part ........................................................ 169 Tab.58 - Coaxial Connectors for External Synchronization Signal ........................................ 170 Tab.59 - Test item of on-site acceptance test ................................................................... 180 Tab.60 - Theoretical return loss calculation data ............................................................... 183 Tab.61 - CN34 connector pin assignment......................................................................... 184 Tab.62 - Tolerable TX Frequency Deviation for 64QAM System ........................................... 187 Tab.63 - Tolerable TX Frequency Deviation for 128QAM System ......................................... 189 Tab.64 - External Clock Frequency Limits ........................................................................ 201 Tab.65 - Rack Alarm Bus Pinouts .................................................................................... 202 Tab.66 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel .......................................................................... 205 Tab.67 - Function of Rotary Switch (12) .......................................................................... 205 Tab.68 - Strap pin for SD DADE adjustment..................................................................... 206 Tab.69 - DADE setting for SD......................................................................................... 207 Tab.70 - Hardware Setting Position................................................................................. 208 Tab.71 - TCU unit......................................................................................................... 209 Tab.72 - BSW unit ........................................................................................................ 210 Tab.73 - OPT BSW unit ................................................................................................. 211
292
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
Tab.74 - Set-up Data for IF-IF TEST ............................................................................... 215 Tab.75 - Mode 1 Confirmation Items of Switching ............................................................. 235 Tab.76 Menu Description........................................................................................... 238
Tab.77 - Condition Message ........................................................................................... 239 Tab.78 - Performance Monitoring.................................................................................... 244 Tab.79 - Control Command............................................................................................ 248 Tab.80 - Provisioning .................................................................................................... 250 Tab.81 - LEGEND ......................................................................................................... 254 Tab.82 - Service Affect.................................................................................................. 254 Tab.83 - LED Indication................................................................................................. 254 Tab.84 - Applicable Characters....................................................................................... 259 Tab.85 - LED Indication of SV unit .................................................................................. 264 Tab.86 - LED Indication of Other Unit.............................................................................. 265 Tab.87 - TL Web LT Major Functions ............................................................................... 266 Tab.88 - System Requirements ...................................................................................... 266 Tab.89 - FAN Alarm and Equipment Condition .................................................................. 268 Tab.90 - Faulty unit report (example) ............................................................................. 273 Tab.91 - Abbreviation of TL Terms .................................................................................. 275
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
293
294
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
35
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
The assistance service provided by Siae Microelettronica will be in compliance, if stipulated, to what specified in the Agreement of Software Maintenance. To exploit this service, fill in all its parts the Module for the notification of bad SW operation (RQ.00961) and send it to the following address: SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21 20093 Cologno Monzese Milano - Italy www.siaemic.it Fax + (39) 02 25391585 e-mail siaemi@siaemic.it
35.1
RQ.00961 MODULE
Each RQ916 module can contain at most one signalling. The information required for the signalling of the bad operation. Warning. The compiling of the parts General Information (Siae only), Trouble notified by, Reserved to Siae Department and Validation manager are at charge of the Siae personnel.
Section Trouble Identification SIAE product name. Identifier or SIAE code of the product whose bad operation has been detected. Version. Version of the sw product whose bad operation has been detected Documentation Type. Identifier of the document where the problem has been detected. Revision. Revision of the document where the problem has been detected. Volume N. Number of the volume of the document where the problem has been detected. Page N. Number of the page, into the volume, where the problem has been detected. Typology. Severity of the detected bad operation: Critical, if it prevents the use of a main functionality of the product; Important, if it prevents the use of a secondary functionality of the product; Disturbing, if occasionally and in difficultly reproducible conditions, it prevents the use of a main functionality of the product; Minor, if very seldom it prevents the use of a secondary functionality without important consequences; Suggestion, if no functionality of the product is damaged but some aspects (e.g.: user interface) can be improved.
Recurrent. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) to cause the bad operation after the same sequence of inputs given to the product. Repeatable. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) to reproduce the detected bad operation. Annexes. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) of annexed to the NM and their possible number.
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
295
Title. Title of the bad operation. Description. Clear and concise description of the bad operation, comprehensive of the edge conditions and, when possible and applicable, of the reference to the test (identifier and version of the technical documentation, test identifier).
296
SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002
GENERAL INFORMATION (SIAE ONLY) Object Submitted Software Documentation Hardware Number
Distribution List: Quality Assurance
TROUBLE NOTIFIED BY Siae Operator Name Customer Report Ref. Company/Dept. Contract N SW/FW failures SIAE product name Documentation Documentation type Volume N. Page N. Typology Recurrent Repeatable Annexes Critical Yes Yes Yes: N Important No No No Disturbing Minor Suggestion ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ Revision ______ ___________________________________________________ Version ______ _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ Date Date Tel e-mail Address TROUBLE IDENTIFICATION _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________
Customer Name Reference _______________________________
Title: Description (including enviranmental conditions):
RESERVED TO SIAE DEPARTMENT Trouble Accepted_Open Rejected Notes Analysis performed by CORRECTIVE ACTION DESCRIPTION Date Expected Closing Date Reasons
FIXED VALIDATION MANAGER Notes MN
Executed by Closed Open Verified by
Date
Approved by Date
Quality Record Module TROUBLE REPORT Siae Microelettronica all rights reserved.
Issued by Terzo L.
Approved by Gaviraghi S. Document Ref. RQ.00961
Date 24/09/02
Page 1/1 Rev/Ver 003

TL Equipment Manual - Mn00126e Ed.02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TL Equipment Manual - Mn00126e Ed.02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SDH TL

MN.00126.E - 002 Volume 1/1

Section 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

Shelf Layout ....................................................................................................35

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATION ...........................................................................42 5.1 Temperature and Humidity ................................................................................42

Section 2. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

12.3 12.4 12.5

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

Wayside Signal Cable Connection...................................................................... 155

Section 4. ACCEPTANCE TEST

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

Section 5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

Section 7. LISTS AND SERVICES

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

Section 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Introduction to the TL Radio Equipment

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

SDH Radio 1+N MS mode

SDH Radio 1+N MS mode

Fig.1 - Linear Configuration

Fig.2 - Media Diversity Configuration

MS Tributary SDH MUX

Tributary SDH MUX SDH MUX

SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1

SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

TL Radio N+1 single-feed operation BRU

: RF Branching Network Unit Block

: Main Signal Transmission Unit Block

: Baseband Interface, Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit Block

: User Interface Area Block

Note: In case that operation mode is set to RS by provisioning, no TCU is needed.

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

TL Radio Alternated operation N+1 BRU

: RF Branching Network Unit Block

: Main Signal Transmission Unit Block

: Baseband Interf., Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit SV BSW TCU HK

: User Interface Area Block

Fig.5 - TL Radio for N+1, Alternated Operation

Note: In case that operation mode is set to RS by provisioning, no TCU is needed.

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

TL Radio 2x(3+1) Co-Channel BRU

: Supervisory Unit x 1 : Supervisory Unit x 1

BSW INTF : Baseband switch interface Unit x 1

: User Interface Area Block

Fig.6 - TL Radio for up to 2x(3+1), Co-Channel Operation

Note: In case that operation mode is set to RS by provisioning, no TCU is needed.

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

TL Radio 2x(7 ) Co-Channel +1

: User Interface Area Block

Fig.7 - TL Radio for up to 2x(7+1), Co-Channel Operation

Note: In case that operation mode is set to RS by provisioning, no TCU is needed.

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002

TL Radio 3+1Double Terminal

: User Interface Area Block

BRU (RF Branching Network Unit)

SDH TL - MN.00126.E - 002